Cataloging Rules Cataloging Rules with explanations and illustrations PREPARED BY DORCAS FELLOWS INSTRUCTOR IN ADVANCED CATALOGING NEW YORK STATE LIBRARY SCHOOL SECOND EDITION REVISED AND ENLARGED NEW YORK THE H. W. WILSON COMPANY LONDON: GRAFTON 6C CO. 1922 Copyright 1922 by THE H. W. WILSON COMPANY Published March 1922 Printed In the^United States of America DEDICATED TO DR MELVIL DEWEY FOUNDER OF THE FIRST LIBRARY SCHOOL AND THE LEADER TO WHOM ALL LIBRARY WORKERS ARE UNDER INFINITE OBLIGATION SUMMARIZED CONTENTS For the convenience of those ment of any of the subjects listed is given on the following pages. PAGE Preface l The value of a knowledge of cataloging 5 General directions and sugges- tions 8 Author entries I0 Subject entries 38 Subject references 47 Title entries 55 Editors, compilers and trans- lators 58 Illustrators etc 62 General secondary entries 64 Notes : miscellaneous 67 Joint authors 69 Name references 78 Compiler, editor or translator as author 82 Series notes 85 Series entries 87 Contents 97 Incomplete works 106 Pseudonyms and other pen names no Anonymous books 117 Initials 120 Partial titles; Binder's titles, Cover titles, Half-titles, and Running titles; Changed titles, including translations under different titles 131 who desire an outline of the treat- below an analytic table of contents PAGE Anonymous classics and Sacred books 144 Voluminous authors 155 Collections under title 159 Analytics 164 Independents 185 Added editions 192 Indexes, Keys, Supplements, At- lases and Portfolios 199 Periodicals 202 Almanacs and Yearbooks 231 Directories 232 Corporate entries 233 Government documents 236 Miscellaneous printed material 245 Art objects, natural history specimens and miscellaneous objects 260 Appendixes 268 App.i Fiction and other forms of literature 268 App.2 Biography 270 App.3 Authority list 273 App.4 Guides 280 App.5 Lists of articles and abbreviations 289 \ Index 293 Vll ANALYTIC CONTENTS For a bird's-eye view of the contents sec page vii. SECTION' PAGE Preface i The value of a knowledge of cataloging 5 General directions and suggestions .... 8 1 Handwritten cards 8 a Legibility 8 b Space between words 8 c Space between groups.... 8 d Other spacing 8 2 Typewritten cards 8 c Space at top of card .... 8 b Cards evenly placed on roller 8 c Position with relation to vertical rules 8 d Space between lines 8 e Clear cut impression .... 8 / Spacing in person's name when inverted 8 g Space before distinguish- ing marks 9 h Spacing in headings with subdivisions 9 i Spacing in title 9 / Division between syllables 9 k Division of personal names 9 / Separation of numeral from abbreviation 10 111 Space in imprint and colla- tion 10 11 Contents 10 o Copyright date 10 p Figure 1 10 q Fractions 10 r Exceptions to rules 10 j Neatness 1 3 Capitalization 1 4 Numerals 1 5 Abbreviations 1 a In headings 1 b In titles 1 6 Punctuation I a General authorities 1 b Period 1 c Quotation marks 12 d Brackets 12 e Marks of omission 12 / Alternative title 12 g Subtitle 13 h Statement of edition etc. [3 i Tmprint 13 j Double punctuation 13 SECTION PACE 7 Extension cards 14 8 Class work 14 a Routine 14 b Volumes tied together .. 15 c Revision 15 Author entries 16 9 Purpose 16 10 Form 16 11 Definitions 17 12 Author heading 18 a Form 18 b Titles of honor, etc 18 c Incomplete names 19 d Position 20 13 Title 20 c Position 20 b Fulness and wording .... 20 c Edition 21 d Omissions 22 e Initial article 22 ( 1 ) Omission 22 (2) Article in curves 23 (3) Articles in various languages 23 / Author's name 23 g Fulness of names 24 h Additions 24 1 Misprints or errors in spelling 24 j Modified vowels 24 k Accents 24 / Numerals 24 111 Capitals and punctuation 25 14 Imprint 25 a Spacing 25 b Place and publisher 25 (1) Abbreviations for places of publication 25 (2) Place-name followed by state 26 (3) Foreign places 26 (4) Place not given 26 (5) Publisher's name .... 26 (6) More than one place and publisher 27 (7) Different volumes in different places 27 (S) More than one place for the same publisher 27 (9) More than one pub- lisher in the same place 27 c Date 28 (1) Dales other than of Christian era 28 IX CATALOGING RULES SECTIOX PAGE (2) False dates 28 (3) Different volumes with different dates . . 28 (4) Substitutes for im- print date 28 (5) Copyright date differ- ing from imprint date 29 15 Collation 29 a Language and arrangement 29 b Position 29 c Fulness 29 d Volumes 29 e Paging 30 (1) Last numbered page a verso 30 (2) Last numbered page a recto 30 (3) Misprint 30 (4) More than one im- portant group 30 (5) Inclusive 31 (6) Supplied or corrected page numbers 31 (7) Leaves 31 (8) Columns 31 (9) Numbering omitted . . 31 (10) Volumes paged con- tinuously 31 / Illustrations 31 (1) Specifications and ar- rangement 31 (2) Definitions 32 (3) Mention in title 33 (4) Few illustrations .... 33 (5) Number of illustra- tions 33 (6) Colored illustrations 33 (7) Music 33 (8) Fuller specifications 33 9 Size 34 (1) Variations in a set .. 34 (2) Atlases and portfolios 34 (3) Oversized volumes . . 34 :6 Call number 35 a Definition 35 b Position 3:5 c Color 35 d Letters and figures 35 e Variations in call numbers for a set 35 17 Accession number 36 18 Signature 37 Subject entries . . 19 Purpose 20 Form 21 Subject heading a Choice of headings b Color c Position d Punctuation and spacing 22 Author's name 38 38 38 40 40 40 41 41 42 SECTION PAGE a Position 42 b Fulness 42 23 Title 44 o Position 44 b Length 44 c Other details 44 24 Imprint, collation and call number 44 25 Tracing 44 a Definition 44 b Form 44 c Position 45 d Color 45 Subject references ... 47 26 Definition 47 27 Purpose 47 28 "See" reference 47 29 "See also" reference 47 30 Form 47 a Specific references 47 ( 1 ) Definition 47 (2) Position and color . . 47 (3) Additional references 48 (4) Arrangement 48 b General references 50 31 Color in references 52 32 Fulness of forms 52 33 Reference from subject heading to author heading . . 53 34 Call numbers and tracing . . 53 35 Filing 53 Title entries 55 36 Purpose 55 37 Form 55 a Position of title 55 b Length of title 55 c Marks of omission 55 d Editors, translators etc. . . 56 e Imprint 56 / Collation 56 g Author's name 56 h Call number 56 Editors, compilers and translators 58 38 Definitions 58 39 Names of editors etc. in title 58 40 Desirability of added entries 58 41 Two or more editors, com- pilers or translators 58 42 Form 58 a Heading for editor etc... 58 b Author's name 59 c Title 59 d Tmprint and collation .... 59 e Call number 59 ' Illustrators etc 62 43 Illustrators 62 a Main entry under illustra- tor 62 ANALYTIC CONTENTS SECTION PAGE b Added entry under illus- trator 62 c Importance of illustrator 62 d Form for illustrator card 63 44 Binders, publishers, reporters 63 General secondary entries 64 45 Definition 64 46 Treatment 64 Notes: miscellaneous .. 67 47 Scope and order 67 48 Where given 67 49 Form 67 50 Sequels and supplements . . 68 51 Position 68 52 Indention 68 Joint authors 69 53 Definition 69 54 Treatment 69 a Method 1 69 (1) Books by two or three authors 69 (2) Books by more than three authors 71 (3) Title on main card . . 71 (4) Title on added entry joint author cards .... 72 (5) Imprint and collation 72 (6) Subject, title, editor cards, etc 7 2 b Method 2 73 (1) Heading for main card 73 (2) Title on main card . . 73 (3) Added entry joint au- thor cards 73 (4) Imprint and collation 72, c Method 3 75 (1) Main entry 75 (2) Added entry joint au- thor cards 75 (3) Other added entries . . 75 55 Relative advantages and dis- advantages of different meth- ods 76 Name references .... 78 56 When made 78 57 Fulness 78 58 Color 78 59 Examples 78 Compiler, editor or translator as author 82 60 Main entry 82 61 Treatment of name 82 62 Title, imprint, collation etc. 82 63 Compiler etc. in the second- ary relation 82 SECTION PAGE 64 Joint compilers etc. as au- thors 83 Series notes 85 65 Definitions 85 66 When given 85 67 Where found 85 68 Form 85 69 Position 86 Series entries 87 70 Definitions of series entry 87 71 When made 87 72 Form 87 a Heading 87 (1) Variations in name of series 88 (2) Position and indention 89 (3) Editor's name includ- ed in name of series 89 (4) Entry under editor's name • 89 (5) Series consisting of works by the same author 89 (6) Abbreviations 90 (7) Wording 90 (8) Punctuation 90 b Entries for separate works 90 (1) Items included 90 (2) Position of entries and number of lines . . 91 (3) Indention 91 (4) Arrangement of items by author 9 1 (5) Arrangement of items by subject 91 (6) Examples of arrange- ment 9 2 c Editor reference 92 d Tracing ■. 93 (1) Series entries ...... 93 (2) References to series cards 93 c Title-page checks 93 Contents 97 72, When given 97 74 Where given 07 75 Inclusion and form 97 76 Arrangement 98 77 Position 99 7S Indention 99 79 Punctuation 99 So Substitutes for contents .... 104 a In title 104 b In general note 105 c Condensed 105 Incomplete works . . . 106 81 How received 106 82 Information liable to change 106 XI CATALOGING RULES SECTION PAGE a First and last volumes both at hand 106 b First or last volume want- ing 106 c Small part of a set 106 d Imprint date liable to change 107 83 Added entries 107 S4 Contents 107 a Alphabetic contents 107 b Chronologic contents 107 c Contents on both author and subject cards 108 Pseudonyms and other pen names 85 Definitions of pseudonym . . 86 Entry a Choice of heading b Entry under pseudonym . . c Entry under real name . . . d Both real name and pseud- onym on title-page e Double entry 87 Name references 88 Title cards 89 Pen names which are parts of real names a Heading and reference . . b Name in title c Title cards 90 Sobriquets, nicknames etc. . . Anonymous books . . . 91 Definitions 92 Treatment a Author known (1) Identifying phrases .. (2) Title cards b Author unknown (1) Alain entry (2) Added entries (3) Identifying phrases . . (4) Author found after book is cataloged .... (5) Title cards c Anonymous books — By tin author of d Reference from well- known titles Initials 93 Author's name known .... a Main entry b Added entries c Treatment of the initials (1 ) Method 1 : general secondary entries .... (2) Method 2: references from initials without book title SECTION PAGE (3) Method 3: references from initials with book title 120 94 Author's name unknown .... 125 a Anonymous treatment .... 125 (1) General secondary en- tries under initials . . 125 (2) Author's name found later 125 b Initials etc. used as author heading 127 (1) Treatment of initials in title-page order .... 127 (2) Author's name found later 127 (3) Title cards 128 Partial titles; Binder's titles, Cover titles, Half-titles and Running titles; Changed titles, including translations under different titles 131 95 Partial title 131 96 Binder's titles, Cover titles, Half-titles and Running titles 132 97 Changed titles 133 a Varieties 133 b Treatment 133 (1) References from title not in library 137 (a) Author reference 137 (b) Title reference . . 137 (2) When references are not made for missing titles 138 (a) Title 138 (b) Subject 138 (c) Editor, translator etc 138 (3) Notes 138 (4) Call numbers 139 (5) Tracing 139 98 Translations under different titles 139 a Alternative method 141 Anonymous classics and Sacred books 144 09 General treatment 144 a Parts of anonymous clas- sics 145 b Selected list of headings 145 c Bible 146 (1) Bibles in two lan- guages 147 (2) Old Testament and New Testament in heading 147 (3) References 147 (4) Form entries 147 (5) Editor and translator cards 147 Xll ANALYTIC CONTEXTS SECTION* PAGE (6) Title entries 148 (7) Series cards 148 (8) Capitalization 148 (9) Arrangement 149 (10) Commentaries 140 (11) Paraphrases 150 Voluminous authors . . 155 100 Definition 1 55 101 Author heading 155 102 Title entries 155 103 Catch title in author item on title and editor cards 156 104 Editor card in series form 156 Collections under title . . 159 105 Main entry 159 106 Added entries 159 107 Author's names mentioned 159 Analytics 164 10S Definitions 164 109 Scope t 64 a Author analytics 164 (1) Author of the part same as author of the work as a whole .... 165 (2) Author of the part different from author of the work as a whole 165 (a) Analytics vs joint authors 165 (3) Heading for main en- try when the work is one calling for analytic treatment 166 (4) Names of authors in title, contents or note 166 (5) Author of analytic same as editor of the book 167 b Subject analytics 167 c Title analytics 16S d Editor analytics, etc ... e Combinations 16S no Method of treatment a Division by plan of paging 16S b Author's name c Title inn d Imprint 1 70 1 illation 170 / Reference to main work 170 Form of analytic entries 170 h Punctuation and spacing 170 1 < all numbers 171 ;" Tracing 171 k Continuous paging 171 / Separate paging 177 ;;/ Both continuous and sep- arate paging 170 n Analytic within an ana- lytic r8o SECTION* PAGE Short form analytics .... 181 p Alternative methods 183 Independents 185 1 1 1 Definition 185 112 Independents vs separately paged analytics 1S5 113 Treatment of independents as distinguished from analytics 1S5 a Size 186 b Tracing for the volume as a whole 186 c Tracing of added entries for independents other than the first 1S6 d Note of contents on main card 186 e Note of contents on other cards 1S6 114 Treatment of independents and separately paged ana- lytics in the same way iSS a Treatment of all as inde- pendents iSS b Treatment of all as ana- lytics 1S9 (1) Title-pages 189 (2) Contents 189 (3) Cataloging 189 Added editions 192 115 Definition of edition 192 116 Definition of added edition 193 117 Treatment of added editions 193 a Author's name 194 b Title 194 (1) Titles wholly or partly identical 194 (2) Longer entries added to shorter 194 (3) More than two edi- tions I'M (4) Different editors .... 195 (5) Slight variations in title 195 c Imprint, collation and series note i" 1 " d Notes 105 e Treatment of author's name and of title on main vs secondary cards 106 / Onli r i«i" entries g Call numbers 196 h Accession numbers 196 Indexes, Keys. Supplements, Atlases and Portfolios 199 n8 Treated like added editions 199 Periodicals 202 mm Definitions [20 General treatment 202 i_'i Form entry 202 Xlll CATALOGING RULES SECTION PAGE 122 Fulness of description 203 1 23 Groups 20 3 124 Complete finished sets 203 a Main entry 203 ( 1 ) Position 203 (2) Title 204 (a) Frequency of pub- lication 204 (b) Editors 204 (c) Dates covered by volumes 204 (d) Abbreviations for months 205 (e) Information sup- plied or omitted 205 (3) Imprint 205 (a) Place changed . . . 205 (b) Publisher changed 205 (c) Imprint dates 205 (4) Collation 205 (5) Notes 206 (a) Order of arrange- ment 206 (b) Indention 206 (c) Items combined . . 206 (6) Indexes 207 (7) Supplements 207 b Added entries for subjects, editors etc 208 ( 1 ) Importance 208 (2) Position 20S (3) Form 208 (a) Subject cards .... 208 (b) Editor cards 208 (c) General secondary cards 209 125 Call numbers 209 126 Accession numbers 209 127 Capitalization 209 128 Complete current sets 213 a Main entry 213 (1) Title 213 (a) Dates covered . . 213 (2) Imprint 213 (3) Collation 214 (4) Notes 215 (5) Indexes 215 b Added entries for subjects, editors etc 215 (1) Importance and posi- tion 215 (2) Subject 215 (3) Editor cards, general secondary cards etc. 215 r Call numbers 216 d Accession numbers 216 e Periodical no longer re- ceived 216 129 Incomplete sets 220 a Main entry 220 Ci) Sets slightly incom- plete 220 SECTION" PACE (a) Note for missing parts 220 (b) v.i wanting 220 (2) Sets decidedly incom- plete 220 (a) Place and pub- lisher 221 (b) Illustrations 221 (c) Size 221 (d) "Library has" statement 221 (e) Mi seel- notes 223 (f) Indexes 223 (g) Completion of sets 223 b Added entries for subjects, editors etc 223 (1) Importance and posi- tion 223 (2) Subject ... 224 (3) Editor cards, general secondary cards etc. . . 224 c Call numbers and accession numbers 224 130 Added entries for partial titles 226 131 Changed titles 227 a Decided changes 227 b Slight changes 227 c Editor cards, general sec- ondary cards etc 227 132 "Merged in" or "Incorpo- rated with" 228 133 New York state library method 229 Almanacs and Yearbooks 231 134 Treatment 231 a Place 231 /> Volumes 231 Directories 232 135 Treatment 232 Corporate entries 233 136 Corporate vs personal au- thors 233 137 Definitions 233 138 Form of entry 233 139 Complete works vs serials .. 234 140 Reports 234 a Complete works 234 b Serials 234 t ir \ntlinr retained in title .... 234 T42 Publisher 234 143 Spacing in headings 235 144 Brackets 235 a Variation from title-page 235 b Matter supplied 235 Government documents 236 1 15 Government documents vs society publications 236 XIV ANALYTIC CONTENTS SECTION PAGE 146 Change in author or title . . 236 147 Reference list 236 148 Author heading 237 a Inverted vs uninvertcd forms 237 149 Main entry 238 150 General secondary entries . . 238 151 References 239 a From names of depart- ments etc 239 b From chiefs of depart- ments 239 c From magistrates 240 152 Subject entry vs reference . . 241 - 153 "Library has" statement 241 154 Indexed sets 242 155 Analytics 242 156 Publisher 243 157 Series notes 244 Miscellaneous printed material 245 158 Series cards for addresses, bulletins, society publications, etc 245 159 Extracts and separates .... 246 160 Selections from a single work of an author 247 161 Criticism 249 a General criticism 249 b Special criticism 249 c Colored cards 250 162 Dramatizations, parodies etc. 251 163 Attributed author 252 a Doubtful authorship .... 252 b Mistaken authorship 252 c Erroneously listed 253 d Call numbers and tracing 253 164 Analytics in series form . . 253 165 Pamphlets 254 166 Clippings 255 167 Maps 256 168 Printed forms 257 Art objects, natural history specimens and miscellaneous objects 260 169 Purpose of the chapter .... 260 170 Catalog entries 260 a Main entry 260 b Title 260 c Use of photography .... 262 d Details to be noted .... 262 171 Value of special catalog .... 263 172 Inclusion of entries in main catalog 263 173 Reading lists 263 174 Photograph collection 263 175 Lantern slides 265 SECTION" PAGE 176 Form of special catalog 265 177 Prints and Music 267 Appendixes 268 App.l Fiction and other forms of literature 268 App.2 Biography 270 Autobiography 270 Letters 271 Life and letters 271 Correspondence 272 App.3 Authority list 273 Scope 273 Purpose 273 Value 273 Form of entry 274 a Heading for either main or added entry . . 274 b Title and imprint 274 c Details for added en- try slips 274 d Citations 275 e Reference tracing 276 / Reference slips ...... 276 g Societies, institutions etc 276 h Anonymous classics and Sacred books... 276 i Anonymous book (au- thor unknown) 276 j Series headings 277 k Signature 277 Corrections and additions 277 Subject headings list .... 278 a Color 278 b Form of entry 278 c Authority citations . . 279 App.4 Guides 280 Definition and purpose . . 280 Styles of guides 280 Systems of guiding 281 Printed guides . 283 Guides bearing additional directions and informa- tion 284 Protected tabs 285 Lettering 285 Frequency of guides .... 286 Uses other than for dic- tionary catalogs 286 Labeling trays 287 App.5 Lists of articles and ab- breviations 289 Articles in various lan- guages 289 Colon abbreviations for forenames 290 Personal titles 2or Places of publication .... 29J Index 293 XV CATALOGING RULES PREFACE The following code of rules is a revision of Library School Bulletin 36, issued by the New York State Library, which was in turn a revision of the stenciled directions used in conducting the cataloging course in the New York State Library School, 1911-1914. These directions were first prepared to save the time previously devoted to note-taking in class, and to furnish fuller information than could be given in class or otherwise be provided in the limited time devoted to the course, with a view to furnish- ing not only the instructions necessary for class exercises but a compilation useful for reference in later work. With these aims in mind the attempt was made to answer as many as possible of the questions which had arisen in the author's experience in the actual work of cataloging and in years of contact with library school students. As a result numerous details were included which may to many seem petty and superfluous but which had shown themselves to be very substantial stumbling blocks to persons first struggling with the actual problems. In preparing the work as a textbook for the Library School it was recognized that different local conditions called for different treatment and an attempt was accordingly made, by explanatory statements and by suggestions of alternative methods, to give a somewhat broad view and to make the rules adaptable to vary- ing needs. That feature has in this second edition received still further attention, with special reference to the smaller libraries and to the courses in summer schools, while certain minute specifica- tions, originally included merely for the author's convenience in class work, have been omitted. In the case of alternative methods an individual library should choose the one which seems best adapted to its needs, allowing variations in very exceptional instances only. The work is based on Catalog rules, author and title entries, compiled by committees of the American Library Association and the {British) Library Association; American edition, T908 (cited for convenience as . /. L. A. rules), to which (as well as to Cutter's Rules for a dictionary catalog; .//// edition. T904, cited as Cutter and to the Library of Congress rules) frequent reference is made, 1 CATALOGING RULES the intention being not to take the place of the A. L. A. code, but rather to serve as an introduction to it and enable catalogers to use it with a better understanding. Many, however, of the most im- portant of the A. L. A. rules and definitions have been quoted in the following pages, specially for the purpose of facilitating the work in summer schools, where it is planned to give the most pos- sible instruction in the least possible time. No attempt has been made to take up all the rules in the A. L. A. code, but mainly those topics commonly met in the work of cataloging, in the belief that students well grounded in these should, through the very full pro- vision made in the A. L. A. rules, be able to adapt themselves to any ordinary conditions. The few variations from the A. L. A. rules have been chiefly in the interests of simplification ; first in the belief that it was bet- ter that library school students should, while cataloging fully enough to become accustomed to noticing details, still find time to handle a considerable number of books rather than a smaller number with more minute specifications ; and, second, with a view to presenting on the card such information as would probably be of reasonably general interest to readers. In some cases also a modification has been adopted with a special view to manuscript cataloging in dis- tinction from printed entries, for which the A. L. A. recommenda- tion seemed specially designed. Supplementing the A. L. A. provi- sion for author and title entries the following directions take up also forms for the subject entries and subject references which form so important a part of a dictionary catalog. To Miss Corinne Bacon, formerly instructor in the New York State Library School, we owe an inestimable debt. After the de- struction by fire in March 1911, of all the Library School equip- ment, she generously lent to us her own notes on the courses which she had previously given, and those notes are to a very great ex- tent incorporated in the present rules. Others to whom grateful acknowledgment is due are Mr. J. C. M. Hanson and Mr. W. W. Bishop, the past and present chairmen of the A. L. A. committee on catalog rules, Mr Charles Martel, chief of the catalog division of the Library of Congress, and Miss Mary E. Hazeltine, preceptor of the Wisconsin Library School, for cordial permission to make such use as seemed best of the codes of rules which they officially represent, and to various members of the New York State Library staff and Library School faculty, specially the director, Dr. James I. Wyer, for his sympathetic and generally helpful attitude, and Miss Florence Woodworth and Miss Edna M. Sanderson, for their PREFACE ever-ready counsel and encouragement, also Miss Isabella K. Rhodes, the present instructor in cataloging in the New York State Library School, for invaluable assistance in reconstructing the course after the fire, as well as for numerous later suggestions, to Miss Katharine Dame, Miss Jean Hawkins and Miss Mary E. Hyde, former instructors in the State Library School, and Miss Caroline Wandell, formerly of the Syracuse University Library School, for helpful suggestions and for material directly contributed to the present edition, to instructors in other library schools for scattered criticisms and suggestions, and by no means least to Miss Ada Alice Jones, to whose instruction in cataloging the author owes the chief part of her knowledge of the subject. Thanks should likewise be specifically rendered to Miss Mary Ellis, New York State Library indexer, for the carefully prepared index, which adds so greatly to the usefulness of the publication, and to Miss Helen W. Tompkins, head classifier of the New York State Library, for valuable aid in both the earliest and the latest stages of the work ; also to the publisher, Mr. H. W. Wilson, for his cordial cooperation with the author's endeavor to bring about the most satisfactory possible results, and to Miss Edith M. Phelps, of the H. W. Wilson Company, for her interested and careful super- vision of the work as it passed through the press. To the A. L. A. Publishing Board also thanks are extended for permission to include in the present edition material appearing in the earlier edition but afterward covered by A. L. A. copyright. The primary purpose of the book, namely as a textbook for courses in cataloging, is responsible for the plan of arrangement, which has in view the presentation of topics in such order as will readily lend itself to graded lists of illustrative material for class work, beginning with the simplest and most common features, and advancing to the more difficult and less frequent types. In many cases the sample cards have been adapted from printed entries with- out the illustrative book at hand and might, on comparison with the book, be found to differ in details from the directions in the following code, but the examples were chosen as seeming to meet the need better than any other material at the moment available, and if due allowance is made in view of this explanation it will perhaps prevent misunderstanding. In a number of cases the directions given in the earlier edition have been altered, generally for the purpose of conforming to the methods used on Library of Congress cards. With this in view the Library of Congress rules have been carefully consulted and 3 CATALOGING RULES frequently adopted exactly. In some details, however, perhaps through oversight, or heeause the methods most desirable for printed cards do not seem best adapted to manuscript or typewritten cards, or to secure briefer treatment, the present rules still lack consistency with Library of Congress usage. Libraries desiring such consis- tency should obtain a copy of the Library of Congress rules from the card division of the Library of Congress. Many other libraries, not concerned for absolute consistency, would still find many of those rules of great value in their character of a supplement to those given in the A. L. A. code, while some libraries would find helpful suggestions even in certain of the rules relating distinctly to the Library of Congress cataloging routine. Detailed information in regard to the character of the rules and their price is given in the Library of Congress' Handbook of card distribution; 4th edi- tion, 1918, p. 87-89. Not only do varying conditions develop varying needs but human nature is so constituted as to make it inevitable that different catalogers should differ in their opinions and preferences, even to the point occasionally of holding those directly opposite. Con- sequently it is impossible to promise that every suggestion which may be made will be adopted in a later edition, but all criticisms will be gratefully received and given a balanced consideration, in the hope of combining them to bring about the utmost possible im- provement. Likewise the work will doubtless be found in many places open to criticism due to the hurried way in which it was prepared, but the pressure brought to bear in the matter of issuing a new edition was so great that it seemed inadvisable to delay the work to the extent necessary to do it as carefully as was to be desired. It is hoped, however, that explanatory notes have been sufficiently introduced to prevent confusion. Dorcas Fellows New York State Library Albany, X. V ~ January 28, 1922 THE VALUE OF A KNOWLEDGE OF CATALOGING Among those of us who are largely engaged in the work of cataloging there are probably very few who look upon it as an un- mixed joy. Fortunate we are, therefore, if, once in a while, we are privileged to have it brought home to us, by someone whose opinion we hold in specially high regard, that our work with all its painstaking detail is worth the doing, primarily for the readers to be thereby served but none the less truly for those who are trained to render the service. In 1915 the students of the New York State Library School were thus favored in the opportunity to listen to a most inspiring address from Mr William Warner Bishop. From this address, entitled "Cataloging as an asset" 1 a few extracts are, with the author's permission, quoted below. The author, now li- brarian of the University of Michigan and an ex-president of the American Library Association, was at the time of the address superintendent of the reading room in the Library of Congress, and spoke from the point of view of one who, having extended ex- perience in the actual work of cataloging and therefore knowing its difficulties and trials, knew also its relation to the other features of library administration and its special importance as a factor in the ultimate purpose of that administration — service to the public. "It is as a working tool that I would have you consider the catalog. It is not primarily a record — remember that! Libraries keep some sort of accessions record for business ends. But they make catalogs for the use of their readers. The point is vital. Unless you think of the catalog as an instrument, you lose entirely the point of view of modern cataloging practice. It is an instrument whereby one can find out — if he knows how — whether the library has a book he wants, or whether it has any books on some topic he is interested in. It may be used for scores of other purposes, but these two are the prime reasons for its existence. "I might go on to show that in almost every branch of library work a knowledge of cataloging is practically essential. From the moment a book is suggested for purchase until it lands in the hands of the first reader there are a number of processes to be gone through, as you of course know. Almost all of these (save the merely mechanical) call for an acquaintance with rules of entry, in- creasing with the size of the library and the complexity of its con- tents. In the other processes of administering the books added to the collection a knowledge of cataloging is equally important. But 1 Published in [Ql6 by Williams & Wilkin- Co.. Baltimore. CATALOGING RULES it is in reference work particularly that a thorough knowledge of cataloging counts. I can not state too strongly the need for ref- erence workers who are trained catalogers. When I hear anyone in my force begin to say 'they do so and so' in speaking of the catalog and its makers, I despair of him. Unless his thought (and his word) is 'the rule is so and so,' he has not the root of the matter in him ... A reference assistant who doesn't know how to use his own and other catalogs is practically worthless. ******** "Reference librarians must know well cataloging principles and practice. But so must all workers who have to do with library records . . . [Cataloging] is not drudgery. It is not wasted ef- fort. In studying cataloging you have been learning the grammar of your calling, the tools of your trade, which will be taken for granted in the conduct of large enterprises, in the planning of suc- cessful librarianship. "If, then, a knowledge of cataloging is a very practical necessity for a trained librarian — though by no means his sole necessary equipment, I hasten to add, lest we fall into exaggeration— it would seem to follow naturally that the courses in that subject in library schools should prove one of the most profitable and practical parts of the curriculum ******** "I thmk I am safe in saying that most students in library schools would rather do anything else than take up cataloging on graduation. They are all for administration, for reference work, for the charge of branches or of departments ... If I were planning for the best sort of experience as a training for later work, I would urge most library school students on graduation to spend a couple of years in the cataloging department of some good-sized library. I do not know anything more valuable in the way of training in accuracy, in observation, in judgment, and in general library skill than such practical work in cataloging. In my own work I should prefer graduates with such experience even to persons of the same equipment who had had a couple of years practice in reference work. And I am sure that as a foundation for later service in charge of a library the practical benefit would be very great. "There are certain indirect results of the study and practice of cataloging which I must at least name. The extremely difficult task of correctly describing a book or a document becomes from repe- tition and criticism practically a habit. The work breeds a truly accurate habit of mind, at least so far as the observation and noting of certain externals go. Likewise, a cataloger is not ordinarily at a loss in an effort to locate a book, or to identify a citation. "There is a certain pathetic element of transitoriness and insta- bility about the librarian's calling. His work is for the day, the hour VALUE OF A KNOWLEDGE OF CATALOGING ... In cataloging . . . there is an element of stability and per- manence which carries a certain inner satisfaction that is very real. Non omriis moriar can be said of each cataiogers work. That at least is an asset in a world of change. "Here we come back to our beginning, to your aim as students of library science. If you are to administer libraries, you must know libraries, you must be able to work your machine, you must have practical knowledge of its parts. Nothing in the craft should be foreign to you, least of all the art of cataloging." X-2f CATALOGING RULES GENERAL DIRECTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS Under this heading have been brought together a few notes which, if given when first called for in connection with the cards, would be too scattered for convenient reference, or which have no immediate connection with any special topic as taken up. 1 Handwritten cards, a Legibility. All cards should be writ- ten as neatly and legibly as possible, the disjoined hand being pref- erable, since that most closely resembles print. A catalog on cards, while the only practicable form for being kept even approximately to date, is at best tedious to consult, and the reluctance felt by many readers toward its use will be immeasurably increased if the cards are difficult to read or slovenly in appearance. b Space between zvords. Sufficient space should be left between words to have each stand as a unit, but not enough to produce a disconnected or straggling effect. c Space between groups. Between groups (i. e. between the title and the imprint and between the collation and the series note) there should be one centimeter space (i. e. the distance between the vertical rules on the catalog cards, or four typewriter spaces), unless the space would come at the beginning of a line, when no space should be left. d Other spacing. For space between items in imprint and col- lation follow direction for "space between words," in b above. For other spacing etc. adapt to handwritten work the directions given for typewritten work in 2f-n below ; see also 2r. 2 Typewritten cards, a Space at top of card. In writing the heading on cards leave such space at the top as would result from writing on a line one centimeter from the top edge. b Cards evenly placed on roller. Be sure that the lines run straight across the card, not slanting. c Position with relation to vertical rules. Place the card in the machine so that the first letter on the line will fall just to the right of the vertical rule, not on it. To do this will probably require some experimenting unless the cataloger is familiar with the special machine used. d Space between lines. Leave single space between lines. c Clear cut impression. A quick stroke will generally prevent the duplicate impression which sometimes results from letting the fingers rest on the keys. / Spacing in person's name when inverted. Leave one space after the comma between the surname and the given name or initials, 8 GENERAL DIRECTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 2f-k but not after the period between initials except when space is left to fill in a name if found later; i.e. in headings on cards for authors, editors, etc. if given names are unknown write, for example, Smith, W. H. (leaving eight blank spaces for the filling in of the names), but on subject or title cards for works by the same person write Smith, W. H. g Space before distinguishing marks. If. in a heading, the per- son's name is followed by a title, e. g. bart, earl of, etc. or by dates of birth and death, or other distinguishing marks, or by such designations as ed., comp.. tr., etc. such items are separated from the name and from each other by four spaces. If the name in the heading ends in an initial (representing a name which may be filled in later) the four spaces here specified are in addition to the eight spaces for the filling in of the name. In the case of joint authors, if more than one is used in head- ing (see section 54a, Joint authors, Method 1) the spaces before distinguishing marks may be reduced to two. On Library of Congress cards no space is left, but the difference between the name and the later items is brought out by a difference in type. h Spacing in headings with subdivisions. If subdivisions in a heading are separated from what precedes by a period, this should be followed by one space, if by a dash this should be both preceded and followed by a space. i Spacing in title. In the title generally leave one space after marks of punctuation except after a period used merely to end an abbreviation or after the . . . indicating omission. j Division between syllables. In dividing a word at the end of a line be careful to divide only between syllables. Never divide a word of one syllable, even if it ends in an affix ; e. g. print-ed, but not fill-eel : similarly with words of more than one syllable ; e. g. es-tablished or estab-lished, but not establish-ed. In case of doubt as to correct division consult some authoritative work. Webster and the Standard dictionary show the correct form of division. Do not divide a numeral or an abbreviation; e. g. do not write 10,-000, or 18-89, or il-lus. The hyphen between syllables and also when used between inclusive dates should be placed on the first line rather than on the second. k Division of personal names. When initials of forenames are used in the title do not put part on one line and part on the next. If there is not room for all on the first line carry them all over to the second. 2l-r CATALOGING RULES / Separation of numeral from abbreviation. Do not separate a numeral from the abbreviation to which it applies; e. g. in the case of pages, volumes or size do not write the number at the end of one line and p., v. or cm. at the beginning of the next. If there is not room for the abbreviation on the upper line carry the numeral over to the next. m Space in imprint and collation. Leave four spaces between the title and the imprint, and between the collation and the series note, unless the space would come at the beginning of a line, when no space should be left. Leave one space between the different items of the imprint and of the collation, also between a numeral and the following word or abbreviation to which it belongs if the abbreviation consists of more than two letters; if the abbreviation consists of only one or two let- ters (e. g. p., v., pi., or cm.) leave no space after the numeral; e. g. \ Bost. Houghton, 1916 [ c '07], or 344p. illus. plates, 23^cm., or 2v. in 1, 8pl. 2 maps, 12 facsim. diagrs. 19cm. If the imprint date is followed by a copyright date in brackets, leave one space after the imprint date, but if instead of the bracket a comma is used between the imprint and copyright dates (e. g. when the copy- right date is given on the title-page, or in simplified cataloging) do not leave a space after the comma. Whether it is desirable to leave a space before or after a bracket depends upon the position of the bracket on the individual machine. On some machines a half space is possible and is the best solution, though even on these a better result is, with some letters, obtained by adjusting the carriage by hand. With many machines, however, it is so difficult to place the brackets satisfactorily that it is better to put them in by pen. ?/ Contents. If a period and a dash are used to separate items in contents a space should be left both before and after the dash. o Copyright date. If the machine used does not have a key with the superior "c" for copyright, the same effect may be very satis- factorily obtained by the ordinary "c", placed in the correct posi- tion by means of the free carriage. p Figure i. For the arable figure 1 use lower case letter 1, not capital I, which would be the roman numeral. q Fractions. If the machine does not have the common frac- tion "j/>" the decimal ".5" may be used. Do not use the full-sized figure 1. the slanting line, and the full-sized 2. r Fxceptions to rides. The inflexibility of the typewriter some- times calls for exceptions to the rules for spacing; e. g. if four spaces between groups would make it impossible to write the next item on the line, but three spaces would permit it, it would be bet- 10 GENERAL DIRECTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 2r-6b ter to use only three spaces than to have a very long space at the end of the line ; or sometimes five spaces may be desirable between groups to prevent the long space at the end of the line. Likewise in titles the space after marks of punctuation may be omitted, if desirable in order to write a whole word or a syllable on the line. .? Neatness. Try to make the appearance of the cards such as to be satisfactory for filing in a public catalog. On some machines the writing of the red heading is accompanied by a black impres- sion a line above. When this can not be prevented the black im- pression should be carefully erased after the cards are taken from the machine. 3 Capitalization. Follow A. L. A. rides, TJ2. a Alternative title. Example of alternative title : Twelfth night; or, What you will. 4 Numerals. In general use arabic figures, but use roman numerals in headings for sovereigns and popes (section \2b, first note, last paragraph) ; for numerals in titles see section 13/. 5 Abbreviations. For general abbreviations, follow A. L. A. rules, p. 62-64. For "introduction" on p. 63, in third column add "imprint." a In headings. Abbreviations should be used in the heading on the face of the card only in exceptional cases ; e. g. U. S., the name of the state in which the library is located, the names of other states when following the names of places, and hereditary and professional titles and titles of honor. b /;; titles. Notice specially that words in the title proper are not to be abbreviated. By "the title proper" is generally meant that part of the title which precedes the statement of edition. 6 Punctuation, a General authorities. For general authorities on punctuation the A. L. A. rules recommend De Vinne's Correct composition and lligelow's Punctuation. The following special rules are added to cover distinctive features of catalog entries. b Period. Use a period at the end of the heading (author, sub- ject, editor etc.), title, imprint, collation and notes, unless some other punctuation is specially called for; also after an abbreviation but (in accordance with the modern tendency to avoid useless punctuation) not after a contraction, namely, a shortened form end- ing with the last letter of the word, e. g. Mr. Mrs, Dr etc. 11 6c-f CATALOGING RULES c' Quotation marks. Use quotation marks when given on the title-page. d Brackets. Use very small brackets, e. g. [ ] to indicate in- formation supplied in the heading 1 , title, imprint or collation, except that in the heading they are not used for general titles 2 (e. g. Mrs, baron etc.) nor for distinguishing phrases" (e. g. dates of birth and death or descriptive terms, including titles of nobility when not the entry word) nor for changes in the form of name (e. g. William on the title-page, Wilhelm in the heading used) nor for designations showing relation to the book, as ed., comp. etc., nor for corporate headings, anonymous classics and sacred books. i Brackets on title-page. Brackets used on the title-page are not to lie followed on cards, as brackets on cards indicate matter supplied. For brackets on the title-page parentheses are generally the best substitute. 2 Public library and small library usage. In libraries where biblio- graphic exactness is not of prime importance, including most public li- braries, the use of brackets is not advised except in the case of additions to book titles, where their omission would presuppose the existence in the title on the title-page of what is really not there, and in the collation when the paging given on the cards differs from the final main pagination as the publisher has given it. (For definition of "final main pagination" see note under section 15c.) c Marks of omission. Where work is being done with a view to bibliographic exactness, omissions from the title should be in- dicated by three dots (namely, . . . ) For exceptions see section 13d below. The . . . take the place of a period, comma, colon or semicolon which would otherwise be used. For summer school work and for most public libraries the use of the ... is not advised. f Alternative title. Tn the case of an alternative title (for den- nit inn see section 11 below) use a semicolon after the first title, and a comma after "or" (or its equivalent) before the following title; e. g. Twelfth night; or, JVIiat you will. Exception: In the case of two works published in the same volume with 1 ( hi Library of Congress cards the brackets are not now used in author headings, to show parts of name supplied, the information be- ing given instead by including in the title the author's name in the exact form used on the title-page. - This statement is not to he construed as placing general titles ami distinguishing phrases outside the brackets if tin- name itself is bracketed, e. g. for anonymous books (author known) or pseudonymous books entered under real name. In such cases the entire heading should be inclosed in the brackets, excepting only dates of birth and death and such designations as ed., comp. etc. 12 GENERAL DIRECTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 6£-j a common title-page, on which one or both titles have alternative titles, use a comma before "or," omit the comma after "or" and use a semicolon between the two complete titles; e. g. Twelfth night, or What you will; All's ivell that ends well. Similarly in other places it is sometimes desirable to modify the regular rule to meet unusual conditions. g Subtitle. In the case of a subtitle (for definition see section 11 below) a colon should generally be used to separate from the main title; e. g. Talks on economics: a series of lectures delivered in Boston iSp8-i8pp. A subtille (which really stands in apposition with the main title in its character as a title) should be carefully distinguished from a word or phrase in apposition with a name or other term in its individual significance, which takes the regular comma punctuation; e. g. in The Master of Bal- lantrae: a winter's tale, we have as the second phrase a subtitle, explaining The Master of Ballantrae as the title of the book; in Lamarck, the founder of evolution we have an appositive phrase characterizing Lamarck as an individual. h Statement of edition etc. A statement regarding- the edition or translation, etc. is generally best separated from what precedes by a semicolon, even though the use of brackets results in double punctuation. i Imprint. In the imprint, except in those cases where it would result in double punctuation, generally use a comma between the name of the place and the publisher, between the publisher and the date and between the imprint date and the copyright date, but if two places are given they are (unless, following the title-page, they are connected by a conjunction or a dash) separated by a comma and followed by a semicolon (unless the second place is abbreviated, in which case the period ending the abbreviation, together with the usual space between items, is sufficient). ;' Double punctuation. Tn general avoid double punctuation but use when necessary for clearness; e. g. the period ending an ab- breviation may sometimes be followed by a comma when the ab- breviation occurs in a series of items. The period ending an ab- breviation should also be used in combination with a question mark, an exclamation point, curves, brackets or quotation marks, and in connection with quotation marks the period should be used at the end of a group. The comma should be used in inverted headings to show the inversion, even if followed or preceded by brackets; e. g. Shakespeare, 1 [William] or [Craik], Mrs Dinah Maria (Mulock). When a name ends with a bracket or curve and is ^or the sake of conforming to Library of Congress usage, tlic longer spelling is here adopted in place of the "Shaksperc" used in the first edition. 13 6j-8a CATALOGING RULES followed by some title or explanatory term etc. the bracket or curve is sufficient without the comma; e. g. Russell, W [ illiam ] H L enry] eel. or Brassey, Annie (Allnutt) baroness. In headings in author form, brackets or curves used in a heading before a subhead should be followed by a period; e. g. New York (State). Governor; also a bracket or curve ending an author's name in an analytic reference. 7 Extension cards. When an entry is too long to be written on a single card, additional cards are to be used and numbered 2, 3, etc. at the top edge in the center of the card. Continue the entry on the top line of the additional card, indenting as though con- tinuing on the previous card. On each additional card give in the regular place the call number of the previous card. If there is more than one call number, as in the case of added editions, give on the additional card the call number of the special entry that is carried over. Near the right edge of the card from which the entry is carried over, write or stamp on the next to the bottom line : See next card. Tie all cards of the entry together. On the back of each additional card in the lower left corner when it is tipped forward as for tracing (see section 25 below), give briefly sufficient of the beginning of the entry to be able to restore the card readily if it becomes untied and misplaced. The tracing for added entries, the accession number and the signature are to be given on the first card, not on the additional cards. It is better to write even on the last line of the card if by so doing the use of an additional card may be avoided. 8 Class work, a Routine. 1 The ease and accuracy with which the work is done will be increased if a systematic method is adopted, on some such plan as the following : Making the main (usually the author) card first, verify it care- full}- by the book, in the exact order of items. If this is done, all other cards may be made directly from the main card, without further reference to the book itself except in occasional instances, e. g. when a longer title is desirable on subject cards, or when on series cards the editor's name should be added, etc. Making the remaining cards and slips for the book in the order determined upon (for a suggestion as to such order, see plan of work given below) verify each card or slip as finished and (that the set may, for the convenience of the reviser, be in order when completed) turn it face down and lay on it the succeeding card or slip. When 1 Based on directions given by Miss Mary E. Hyde in class instruction. 14 GENERAL DIRECTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 8a-C completed, turn the pile over and lay the main card on top, after making sure that all cards bearing the call number are traced on the back of the main card. Suggested plan of work 1 Author card 4 Editor, translator, illustrator, Authority slip 1 etc. cards (each followed by Ref. card its own) Ref. slip Authority slip Ref. card 2 Subject cards (each followed Ref. slip by its own) Authority slip 5 Title card ist "see also" ref. card Ref. slip 6 Partial title card 2d "see also" ref. card Ref. slip 7 Series card (etc.) Authority slip ist "see" ref. card Ref. card Ref. slip Ref. slip 2d "see" ref. card Ref. slip 8 Analytic cards, slips, etc. ( e tc) If author analytics are made, with corresponding subject analyt- 3 Joint author cards (each i cs , title analytics, etc., let them fol- followed by its own) low the plan outlined above for the Authority slip treatment of the book as a whole; Ref. card if author analytics are not made, let Ref. slip the order for such anrlytics as are made follow the outline above. b Volumes tied together. If volumes are tied together they should, for class work, be returned to the classwork shelves in the same condition, as it is important for each one who catalogs the set to have all the volumes. c Revision. The following printers' marks are useful in revis- ing cards : 4L meaning "more space" 3 meaning "draw together" | or | meaning "move over toward the open face of the bracket." It is not advised that corrected cards generally be copied. 1 See Appendix 3. 15 g-io CATALOGING RULES AUTHOR ENTRIES As the author is naturally thought of as the starting point of the book, so the author entry or author card is regularly the start- ing point in the cataloging and is regarded in most cases as the main entry. 9 Purpose. This card is arranged (or filed) in the catalog, alphabetically by the author's name, for the use of the reader who is looking up the work from that standpoint. 10 Form. The author entry regularly consists of author head- ing, book title, imprint, collation and call number. Sample of author card (This and following samples are reduced from cards 7.5x12.5cm.) S2.1 rYts24 planjatory duo Crorte Sfoore, Thomas, 1779-1853. Complete poetical works... with ex- notes and biographioal intro- tjion; c standard library ed. 3 N.Y. 11 c c 1395 3 800p. port. 30om. o Simplified form For summer school work and for libraries not desirous of extreme bib- liographic exactness it is recommended that the . . . indicating omission, the brackets (except in title, and in the collation when the paging as given on the cards differs from the last number used by the publisher for the main pagination) and the indication of size be disregarded, as in the following sample. It is also recommended that in the collation "illus." (see section 15/ below) be used instead of the more specific term "plates," except when the plates are a distinct feature as plates, e. g. in scientific and art books. 16 AUTHOR ENTRIES IO-II 82.\ M&2.4 Moorje, Thomas, 1779-1852. Complete poetioal works; with explan- atory notes and biographical introduc- tion; c standard library ed. 3 N.Y. Cro- welli, c 1895. 800p. port. o 11 Definitions. In considering this topic the following technical terms must be understood and their definitions are therefore here given, according to the A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 13-16. Other defini- tions are given later, as called for. Alternative title: A subtitle introduced by "or" or its equivalent ; e. g. Hypatia ; or, New foes with an old face. Author entry: An entry of a work in a catalog under its author's name as heading, whether this be a main or an added heading. The author heading may consist of a personal or a corporate name or some substitute for it, e. g. initials, pseudonym, etc. Collation: That part of the description which specifies the volumes, pages, illustrations, plates, maps, etc. constituting the book. Date: 1 Imprint date: The year of publication as specified on the title-page. 2 Copyright date: The date of copyright as given in the book, as a rule on the back of the title-page. 3 Preface date: The date given at the beginning or end of the preface. 4 Colophon date : The date given in the colophon. Entry: The record of a book in a catalog or list. See also .Main entry. Heading: The word (or words) by which the alphabetic place of an entry in the catalog is determined, generally the name of the author, the subject, or the first word, not an article, of the title. Imprint: The place, publisher's name, and date, ordinarily printed at the foot of the title-page. 17 H-I2bl CATALOGING RULES Main entry: The full or principal entry, as a rule the author entry. (See also Added entry, section 19, below.) In a card catalog the main entry card contains (generally on the back) a record of all the other entries made for the work in question. Printer: The person who prints a book, as distinguished from the publisher and bookseller who issue and sell it. The same person or firm may, however, be printer, publisher, and book- seller, or printer and publisher, or publisher and bookseller. Publisher: See Printer. Subtitle: A secondary or subordinate title, usually explanatory. Title: 1 In the broad sense, the distinguishing name of any writ- ten production as given on the title-page, including the name of the author, editor, translator, the edition, etc., but excluding the imprint. 2 In the narrow sense the title does not include the name of the author, editor, etc. See also Alternative title (above), Binder's title (section 96a), Cover title (section 96a), Half-title (section 96a), Running title (section 96a), Subtitle (above). Ti tie-page: The page at the beginning of a book, on which is printed the title and imprint. (See also Half-title, section 96a below.) 12 Author heading, a Form. For choice of heading for differ- ent classes of writers specific directions are given in the A. L. A. rules, but for a large proportion of books the author heading con- sists of the author's surname, followed by his given names. The usual form of entry for a married woman is her husband's sur- name, the term Mrs, her own given names, and in curves her maiden name; as, Ward, Mrs Elizabeth Stuart (Phelps). For scholarly bibliographic work it is customary to use, with occasional exceptions, the most complete and exact form of name which can be found. For libraries which lack the reference material or the time to furnish such information an acceptable practice is to use the best known form or the fullest form familiar or easily available, a policy which is not only economy for the cataloger, but a convenience to many of the readers, by whom the shorter form of name is more easily recognized, but whatever the general policy it is important that the same form should be used for all works of the same author. b Titles of honor, etc. For the use of titles of honor, distinguish- ing designations, etc. see A. L. A. rules, S5~S7- 1 Titles. The following list shows certain of the most used titles (some used regularly, others when needed to distinguish) and whether pre- fixed or affixed, also whether written with capitals. Titles affixed are separated from the name by a comma (unless the name ends in an abbrevia- tion, calling for a period, or unless it ends with a bracket or curve) and preferably by one centimeter space in handwriting or by four typewriter 18 AUTHOR ENTRIES I2bl-C spaces. 1 Brackets are to be used around such parts of the actual name as do not appear on the title-page, but not around these titles, considered by themselves. (See also section dd above.) Prefixed in headings Affixed in headings Adm. abbe abp bart (and all hereditary titles) Capt. Gen. (for all military officers with a title including General) , Hon. D X> Mme ; r Maj. M.D. Mrs pope Rabbi pres. U. S. (and corresponding Rev. titles for foreign rulers) Sir St For the use and position of the titles "Lady" and "Lord" see Cutter-, 214 and 216. When used as affixes they are not to be capitalized. Roman numerals are to be used after names of rulers and popes in head- ings. 2 Dates of birth and death. Dates of birth and death are affixed to names in headings when needed to distinguish persons of the same name, and are desirable also in other cases if easily found. Like other affixed designations they are separated from what precedes by a comma (unless the preceding matter ends in an abbreviation, calling for a period, or unless it ends with a bracket or curve) and preferably by a centimeter space. If affixed titles of honor etc. and dates arc both used the order is : name, title, date. In the following pages the dates of birth and death have generally, to show arrangement and spacing, been included on the sample cards and in examples in the text, but occasionally the information was lacking and such cases furnish a parallel to corresponding cases in tbe actual catalog- ing of a library. Whether the general policy of the library be to use or to omit the dates, nearly every library will sometimes have need of the other method. c Incomplete names. If only initials for the given names are known to the cataloger a space of two centimeters (or eight type- writer spaces) should, on the catalog cards, be left after each of these initials, to allow for a name of average length to be filled in later if found. If the name is followed by some distinguishing mark, as a title of honor, or dates, the space for the filling in of the name should be in addi- 1 On Library of Congress cards no space is left before titles of honor etc. or dates, but a different face of type from that used for personal names serves to set off these added items in a way which is not possible in type- writing, and it is recommended that on typewritten and manuscript cards the space be left, even though the catalog consists largely of the printed cards. 19 CATALOGING RULES tion to the space which would regularly be left before the distinguishing mark. d Position. Write the author's name on the top line of the catalog" card, beginning at the outer vertical line. If the name runs over the line begin subsequent lines one-half centimeter (two typewriter spaces) to the right of the inner vertical line. Indention at the outer vertical line is sometimes designated as outer (or first) indention; that at the inner vertical line as inner (or second) indention. 13 Title, a Position. Begin the title on the line following the author's name, indenting" to the inner vertical line. When the title runs over the line begin subsequent lines at the outer vertical line. b Fulness and wording-. The title should be copied exactly from the title-page, except for the omission of mottoes, hereditary and professional titles and titles of honor (unless, in the case of such as might be used in headings on cards, these lend weight to the person's connection with the book, as author or editor, etc.) and any other matter not essential because it is either unimportant or is suf- ficiently accounted for elsewhere on the card. 1 The title as given on the cards should always begin with the first word of the printed title, except that the serial number of annual reports etc., frequently the initial article and generally the author's name (including per- sonal titles) may be omitted. For a fuller, valuable treatment of the subject see Cutter, 221-223, 226, 235-236, 239. 1 Variations in different volumes. If title-pages of different volumes of a work differ follow the first unless much the larger part of the set is under another title. The variations when important should be specified on the cards, in the form of notes (see sections 47-52 below), and often ref- erences should be made from the different forms of title, specially if the difference is so great as to suggest a different work. 2 More than one title-page or titles in more than one language. For works with more than one title-page or with titles in more than one lan- guage see A. L. A. rides, 111-146. 3 Title-pages in foreign languages. It is obviously desirable that the cataloger of a book in a foreign language should be able to read the language, at least to the extent of being able to pick out the title by means of a dictionary, but it is equally obvious that such extensive and widespread knowledge is out of the question. For a person with a read- ing knowledge of the language of the book in hand the same rules for 1 In the first part of the cataloging course in the New York state li- brary school the title-pages are marked for length of title for the main card and the subject cards. For other cards students are to use their own judgment. Checks on the title-page arc used as follows: ( ) means "omit from the title on all cards"; 1 1 means "omit from the title on the author card but include on subject cards." 20 AUTHOR ENTRIES I3D3-C4 shortening titles would apply as for English title-pages, special care being taken to avoid any slip in grammatical construction, through the omission of words. For the person whose knowledge of the language is insufficient to insure correct shortening of the title the only safe course in writing the title is to copy the title-page exactly, except for details which are clearly (as indicated by type or position) not a part of the title. 4 Titles of rare books. Give the title or colophon of books of ex- ceptional rarity or curiosity in full, reproducing as far as possible, punctua- tion, capitalization, and typographical peculiarities. A. L. A. rules, 137. (For fuller discussion see Cutter, 351.) c Edition. The statement of edition is to be given in the main entry and on subject cards as a part of the title, preceded by a semicolon (unless there is special reason for some other punctuation, e. g. three dots) and is to be written as on the title-page except that abbreviations may be used as indicated in A. L. A. rules, p. 62-64, and such matter omitted as is indicated in the general rule for short- ening titles, given above under section lob, Title: Fulness and wording. It is customary to omit such statements of reprinting as "8th thousand." For fuller discussion see Cutter, 254-256. 1 Abbreviations. It is sometimes better to write in full the words for which abbreviations are given, e. g. if the word for such abbreviation is coordinate with other words for which abbreviations are not given, if it would not be clear to the reader whether the abbreviation represented a noun or an adjective, or if it is the last word. Also confusing combinations of abbreviations should be avoided; e. g. instead of "American ed., ed by" it would be better to write "American edition, ed. by." 2 Brackets. Brackets should be used if the statement of edition is furnished from any other source than the title-page or if it is transposed from the title-page arrangement, e. g. in cases where i*" is printed at the head of the title-page. 3 Inclusion of names of editors and translators. For fulness of names see section g below. In full cataloging, names of editors and translators are generally in- cluded in the title on the main card and subject cards. In small libraries they may sometimes lie omitted, specially on tlie author card, but should be included for books of which different editions are likely to be brought out by different editors, translators etc. In small libraries the editor etc. might often be omitted from the author card when a book is not likely to appear in different editions by different editors or translators, but even in such cases might be desirable on the subject card, as the name of an editor who was an authority on a subject would hud weight to a book when the author might he comparatively unknown. 4 Different editors for different volumes. When editors for different volumes of a set differ, their names should be given in a note 47-52), or in contents (sections 73-78) for the respective volumes, and the 21 l3C4-e(i)2 CATALOGING RULES editor card (see section 42) should specify in the collation and call num- ber the distinct volume or volumes covered. 5 Different editions represented in the same set. When the volumes in a set are of different editions, specify the various editions in a note or in contents, not in the title. A. L. A. rules, 149. d Omissions. In libraries where bibliographic exactness is desired, on the main card and on subject cards (and on all other cards except at the end of the title) omissions should be indicated by . . . which take the place of a period, comma, colon or semicolon which would otherwise be used. Do not use . . . for the omission of the initial article, the serial number for annual reports etc., the author's name, or for personal titles or other information regarding authors, editors, translators etc. (i. e. those concerned in the making of the books). The title of a picture on the title-page, parts of seals, coats of arms, etc. are not parts of the title of the book and should not be represented by . . . In the most exact bibliographic work, the . . . are used to indicate all omissions from the title. In many libraries where bibliographic exactness is of less importance than is economy of time, the indication of omis- sions is entirely disregarded, and this policy is recommended for most public libraries and for summer school work. The exceptions noted above are intended to provide a rule easily applied, for omissions too slight to seem worth indicating and for many oi those which are satisfactorily accounted for elsewhere on the card. Many other omissions fall under this last specification, e. g. the word "illustrated," but such phrases as "with numerous illustrations," and con- stantly varying degrees of description give rise to so many questions as to whether the fact is sufficiently accounted for elsewhere that it lias seemed best to limit the exceptions to those specified above, about which there is very seldom any doubt. c Initial article. (1) Omission. In order to bring into promi- nence the more important word, omit in English titles the initial article (i. e. the article at the beginning of a title) unless necessary for sense or sound. Never omit the article in foreign languages, or at the beginning of an alternative title, or when needed to balance the article belonging to a later noun, as The rose and the ring. 1 "Sense or sound." Whether the article is "necessary for sense" depends on whether the meaning is changed by its omission ; whether it is "necessary for sound" may be decided by the cataloger on the basis of whether there would have been a consciousness of something lacking if the article had not been printed on the title-page. On Library of Congress cards greater bibliographic exactness is obtained by the regular retention of the initial article. 2 Article in the midst of a title. In libraries using ... to indicate omissions, so slight an omission from the midst of a title as "a" or "the" 22 AUTHOR ENTRIES I3e(l>2-f (with the consequent substitution of the . . . ) is inadvisable. In libraries not using the . . . the importance of retaining the article in the midst of the title depends on the effect of its omission on "sense or sound." (2) Article in curves. Even if the initial article is re- tained it should be disregarded in alphabeting and as an indication of this treatment it may, if desired, be inclosed in ( ) on all cards where the title is likely to be used in alphabeting the cards. This rule for the use of curves around the initial article applies to author cards, subject cards, title cards and cards for editors, translators etc., and is a help to the person filing the cards, specially in the case of foreign titles, where the article might not be recognized as such by a person unfamiliar with the language. The practice is also useful to the person consulting the catalog, since it brings into greater prominence the first distinctive word of the title when this can not be satisfactorily done by omitting the article, as directed above. The rule does not apply to titles in the separate entries on series cards, or in contents, in series notes, in miscellaneous notes, or inside the ( ) inclosing an analytic reference, as in these cases the title does not affect the filing of the card. (3) Articles in various languages. The following list of articles to be disregarded in alphabeting, when appearing at the beginning of titles, is taken from the Library of Congress rules. English: the, a, an Danish, Norwegian, Swedish: den, det, de, en, et, ett Dutch: de, het, 't, een, eene French: le, la, 1', les, un, tine German: der (when representing the masculine nominative), die, das, ein, eine Hungarian: az, a, egy Italian: il, lo, i, gli, gY la, le, 1', uno, un, una, un' Portuguese: o, a, os, as, um, tuna Spanish: el, lo, la, los, las, un, una The Arabic article al (or the assimilated forms ad-, ar-, as-, at-, az-, if used) though joined by a hyphen to the name or word follow- ing (al-Ghazzali, Al-mostatraf) is to be disregarded in alphabeting. Tn Hebrew disregard ha, he (Ha-sefer, He-harim) ; in Yiddish. der, di, dos. Article vs numeral adjective. In cases where the form of the article is the same as that of the numeral adjective "one" (e. g. the French "un" and "une") care should be taken to distinguish the use, as the numeral ad- jective should not be disregarded in alphabeting. f Author's name. Generally the author's name, being given in the author heading, may be omitted from the title, but occasionally it is an integral part of the latter and must be retained ; e. g. Brozen- 23 13*-! CATALOGING RULES ing treasure book ; From day to day with Kipling; Shakespeare for recitation. g Fulness of names. When names, either personal or corporate (authors, editors, translators, etc. or subjects of individual biogra- phies, personal bibliographies and literary criticism) are given in the title on the cards, use the form which is printed on the title- page. 1 In exceptional cases, e. g. when the name used in the head- ing is repeated in the title or when the person referred to is so dis- tinguished that the use of his forenames is unnecessary for his recog- nition, these may be omitted and . . . used instead, but this method should never be followed for names retained at the beginning of a title; such names should always be written as on the title-page. /; Additions. Additions needed to make the title clear may, if brief, be supplied in the title in brackets. Such additions should be in the language of the title. Unless brief, any additions made are preferably given in notes. The omission of the author's name from the title sometimes requires the supplying of the corresponding pronoun, c. g. rhisj, or an ambiguous phrase may need explanation, e. g. "the last t i. e. the iSthj century." i Misprints or errors in spelling. In the case of a misprint, or an error in spelling, the form on the title-page should be retained on the cards, the mistake being indicated by three dots under the incorrect word or the incorrect letter or letters. j Modified vowels. Write the German modified vowels with the umlaut or with the e, as given on the title-page. k Accents. Supply correct accents for French and Greek words when omitted from the title-page but if incorrect accents are printed treat as mistakes in spelling. / Numerals. For numerals occurring in the title, in general use arabic figures; but for cardinals below 10, and for either cardinals or ordinals (adjective numerals) at the beginning f the title, and for the designation of popes, rulers etc. follow the form on the I In the previous edition the names of those concerned in the making of the book (authors, editors, translators, etc.) were in the case of a single forename written as on the title-page, but in the case of two or more fore- names, only the initials were used, e. g. the Divine comedy, appearing on the title-page as "translated by Charles Eliot Norton" would appear on the cards as "tr. by C: E. Norton." The names of persons used as subjects, however, were regularly written as on the title-page, e. g. a title given on the title-page as Life of Charles Eliot Norton would be given on the cards with the same fulness as on the title-page. The present rule has been adopted with a view to obtaining uniform treatment of all names, as well as to conform to Library of Congress usage. 24 AUTHOR ENTRIES 13I-14M1) title-page. When arabic figures are used on the title-page they should be retained on the cards, even if they begin the title. m Capitals and punctuation. See sections 3 and 6 above. The title is preferably written in a single phrase or series of phrases, so punctuated as to form a unit ; i. e. final punctuation, generally the period, should not, except for abbreviations, be used until the end of the title, so far as this is given on the cards. As on many title-pages the punctuation is wholly or largely lacking and must be supplied, there is little advantage in the case of other titles in following the title-page punctuation, except for exact bibliographic work. A more uniform result, therefore, is obtained by giving the title as a single- phrase or combination of phrases, which is in general more pleasing than the fragmentary effect likely to come from the attempt to retain in solid paragraph form the punctuation originally planned for the ends of lines in title-page arrangement. 14 Imprint. The imprint forms a group, consisting on the main card and on subject cards, of place, publisher and date, writ- ten one centimeter (four typewriter spaces) after the title. On other cards use for the imprint only the date. a Spacing. See section 2in above. b Place and publisher. Write the names of the place of publica- tion and the publisher in the language in which they are given on the title-page, using for places the abbreviations included in the fol- lowing list. (1) Abbreviations for places of publica- t i o n. 1 Use the fuller forms in cataloging ; the shorter forms are given only for use in accession and other official records. Use for all languages when the equivalent name contains these letters. Use also the common abbreviations for the states. Albany Alb. England Eng. Amsterdam Amst. Firenze Fir. Baltimore Bait. Glasgow Glasg. or Gl Berlin Ber. Gottingen Got. Boston Bost. or B. Kjobenhavn Kjjzfo. Braunschweig Brns. Leipzig Lpz. Cambridge Camb. or Cb. Leyden Ley. Chicago Chic, or Ch. London Lond. or L. Cincinnati Cin. Lugduni Bata- Copenhagen Copng. vorum Lug. Bat. Dublin Dub. Milano Mil. Edinburgh Edin. or Ed. Milwaukee Milw 1 Taken chiefly from Library School rules. 25 i4b(i)-(5)i CATALOGING RULES Miinchen Miin. St Petersburg St Pet. or St New Orleans N.O. San Francisco San Fran, or New York N.Y. S. F. Oxford Ox. Stuttgart Stut. Paris Par. or P. United States u. s. Philadelphia Phil. or Ph. Venice Ven. or V. St Louis St L Washington Wash, or W. (2 ) P 1 a c e-n a m e f o 1 1 o \v e d b y state. If the place is not well known or if in the case of several places having the same name there is likely to be uncertainty as to which is meant, add the abbre- viation for the state, using brackets if the name is not given on the title-page. (3) Foreign places. On foreign title-pages the place of publication frequently appears in an oblique case. If the name of the place is included in the foregoing list of abbreviations, the abbrevia- tion there given may be used, in whatever case the name occurs on the title-page. If the place is not included in this list the name is best written in the exact form used on the title-page, such other words being retained as are necessary to account for any oblique form used. (4) Place not given. If the place of publication is un- known, write : No place. If the name of the place is not given on the title-page but is known from some other source give the name in brackets. (5) Publisher's name. For well-known firms generally give only the surname (e. g. Harper), but give two surnames if they are hyphenated (e. g. Bobbs-Merrill) or in the case of firms having a very common surname or of a little-known firm having the same surname as the author, or if you know of two firms having the same first surname, let such surname be preceded by the initials of the given names (e. g. R. Clarke, and W. B. Clarke) or followed by the initial of the second surname (e. g. Scott, F. for Scott, Foresman & co. and Scott, G. for Scott, Greenwood & co.) For impersonal firms generally give the full name, using common abbreviations (e. g. Railway world pub. co.) i Lists of publishers. Suggestions as to forms for abbreviations for publishers may be found in the A. L. A. catalog, 1904, pt 1, p. 13-21. Ref- erences in that catalog are not for forms to 1>e used in cataloging, but for convenience in ordering; e. g. with the references "Clarendon, see Oxford university press," and "Westerman, see Lemcke & Buechner," the books should be cataloged with Clarendon and Westerman respectively as pub- lishers as on the title-page, but orders for the books should be sent to the 26 AUTHOR ENTRIES I4b(5)l-(9) Oxford university press and to Lemcke & Buechner. Later lists are given in the A. L. A. catalog, 1904-1911, and in the United States catalog and its supplements. 2 Foreign publishers. For the names of foreign firms which contain a personal name, the surname may generally be used alone in the nomina- tive to represent the firm, if the nominative form is known; e. g. Pirola for Casa editrice di G. Pirola, or Haeggstrom for Ivar Haeggstroms boktryckeii & bokforlagsaktiebolag. If the nominative form is not known, the firm name should be given in the form used on the title-page, or as much of the firm name (including the personal name) as is necessary to justify the oblique case in the personal name. (6) More than one place and publisher. If two or more places and publishers are given on the title-page, use the first, unless another place and publisher (generally distinguished by position or type 1 ) are known to be the actual ones, in which case these are to be preferred. If two are given on the title-page, both may, when desired, be given on the cards in title-page order; in the case of more than two on the title-page, the first or, if desired, the first and the most important of the others may be used. If in the case of foreign books the imprint includes also an Ameri- can place of publication, with American publisher, use these in ad- dition to the foreign place and publisher. If more than one Ameri- can place and publisher are given, use the ones most important from the standpoint of the individual library. For illustrations and fuller treatment see the Library of Congress sup- plementary rule in A. L. A. rules, p. 47-48. (7) Different volumes in different places. When different volumes of a long set are published in many dif- ferent places write in the imprint : Various places. If not more than two or three places are mentioned they may be specified in the imprint; as, v. 1-3, Bost. Roberts, 1894; v. 4, N.Y. Putnam, 1896; or the first place may be given in the imprint and variations men- tioned in a note. (8) More than one place for the same pub- lisher. If more than one place is given for the same publisher, either the first alone or the first and the most important of the others may be given, followed by the publisher's name. (9) More than one publisher in the same place. If the imprint gives more than one publisher in the same place, the name of the place may be followed by the name of the iir>t publisher 1 For illustration sec A. L. A. rides, p. 47, second example under Books published abroad." 27 I4b(9)-c(4) CATALOGING RULES or, when desired, by the name of the first and the most important of the others. c Date. After the publisher's name followed by a comma (un- less ending in an abbreviation or unless brackets are used), give the date of imprint. Give in arabic figures the date found on the title- page, unless the form of that date is characteristic of a special edition or otherwise worthy of note. If the copyright date differs from the imprint date give it in addition to the imprint date. (1) Dates other than of Christian era. For dates other than those of the Christian era see A. L. A. rules, 155. (2) F a 1 s e dates. When a date is given falsely, whether in- tentionally or by a typographical error, give the date as given on the title-page, followed in brackets by the true date of publication, if it can be found, preceded by "i. e." for example: N. Y. Horton, 1953 [i. e. 1853]. (3) Different volumes with different dates. When different volumes of a set were published at different times, give inclusive dates, using for the second only the last two figures, unless the century changes; e. g. 1894-96, but 1898-1901. If the date of v. 1 is later than the first date, this fact may, if thought desirable, be indicated in curves after the inclusive dates ; e. g. 1908-14 (v- 1, '14). (4) Substitutes for imprint d a t e. When there is no imprint date, unless the date of publication is known from some other source give the copyright date (generally found on the back of the title-page), preceded by a superior c, and (in exact work) bracketed (except in the few cases when found on the title-page). When there is neither imprint nor copyright date give the date of preface or introduction etc. e. g. L pref. 1898], or [introd, 1903], using brackets in exact work. When no definite date is found use an ap- proximate date if possible; e. g. [189-] or t 19 — ,. If not even the century is certain, use n. d. (meaning no date), unless the work was clcaiiv published so near the beginning of the century that an ap- proximate date can be assigned. If a date, either exact or ap- proximate, is merely probable and not certain use a question mark; e. g. t 1903?] or L 190-?]. In the case of uncertain inclusive dates, show whether both or only one is uncertain; e. g. [1903?-?05], both being uncertain; t 1903? r 05, only the first being uncertain; 1903- [P05], only the second being uncertain. Such phrases as "Entered in the clerk's office for the southern district 28 AUTHOR ENTRIES I4c(4)-*5d( 2 ) of New York" have the same significance as the present copyright state- ment and should receive the same treatment. When no copyright date is given but a statement is made of the original date of publication or the date of the first edition, this may be given in a note corresponding to the statement in the book, but should not be treated as the equivalent of copyright. ( 5 ) Copyright date differing" from imprint date. W'lien the copyright date differs from the imprint date and is therefore given in addition to the imprint date, unless it is of a different century from the imprint date give it in abbreviated form as shown below. If there is more than one copyright date give the extreme dates, connected by a dash and writing the last in full only if the century changes. Examples: 1006 [ e i894- 1 1905 ^1893-19013 1906 f'oS) 1902-04 ^'02-033 1905 ^'oi-oSj 1897-1903 (v. 1, '03) ^'1895-19003 Notice that the apostrophe is not used after the dash in inclusive dates. 15 Collation, a Language and arrangement. Give all items of collation in English and in the following order: 1st, volumes or pages; 2d, illustrations; 3d, size. A. L. A. rules, 158. b Position, The collation, constituting a separate group, is writ- ten on the line after the imprint, indented to the inner vertical line. If the collation runs over the line, begin subsequent lines at the outer vertical line. c Fulness. Give full collation on only the main card and the subject cards. On other cards give as collation only the number of volumes when more than one. d Volumes. (1) Definition of volume, (a) A book distinguished from other books or from other parts of the same work by having its own title-page and usually independent paging. Whatever is contained in one binding. A. L. .1. rules, pref. p. 16. (2) Number. Give in arabic figures the number of volumes, in all entries where more than one; volume is included. If the num- ber of volumes as given by the publisher differs from the number as bound give first the publisher's number followed by the number of bound pieces; e. g. 2v. in 1 ; 3v. in 2; 3v. in 6. t hi the main card and all subject cards follow this method, but on other cards the item may, if preferred, be given only when the hound work contains more than one piece. When given, give as on the main card. (See also second note under e{ 4) below . ) 29 I5e-e(4) CATALOGING RULES e Paging. For works in one volume generally give, using arabic figures, the final main pagination as the publisher has given it. By "final main pagination" is meant the last page number used by the publisher in the continuous numbering of the principal group of pages. This generally includes the index. The main pagination is a valuable item, as it gives the reader an approximate idea of the size of the book, thus in- dicating in some measure the fulness of treatment. For a more detailed and exact method of recording the paging see A. L. A. rules, 160, and on p. 51 of that code the Library of Congress supplementary rule. (1) Last numbered page a verso. If the last num- bered page is a verso (i. e. the lefthand page) and there is printing on the following recto (righthand page) which is clearly a con- tinuation of the preceding or if in the case of a separate list, table of contents, etc. (frequent in French books) there is strong evidence that if the pages had been numbered they would have continued the previous paging, add to the publisher's final paging the number of pages which you think would have been included in the continuous paging if they had been numbered, and give the figures for the total in brackets, e. g. t 423]p. (See (6) below.) (2) Last numbered page a recto. If the pub- lisher's last numbered page is a recto and there is merely a printed verso accept the publisher's paging unless the verso contains matter to which it is desirable to refer by page number in a note or in the contents. In this case the page number of the verso should be included in the pagination given in the collation, in the form pre- scribed for the treatment of an unnumbered recto, in (\) above; in other cases the page number of the recto is sufficient, as the verso could not be lost without losing the recto. (3) Misprint. If there is obviously a misprint the situation may be met either by (a) giving in the collation the paging given in the book, followed in brackets by the correct paging ( e. g. 269 [i. e. 296] p.) or (b) by giving the correct paging in the collation, in brackets, with the incorrect paging specified in a note, e. g. In book last page incorrectly given as 269. The second method is recommended as being clearer to the reader. (4) More than one important group. If a book is made up of two or three groups of paging (not preface, index or appendix paging) which seem to be about equally important, give each final pagination, separating the groups by a comma, e. g. 232, 250, 193p. If there arc more than three such groups, (a) give the 30 AUTHOR ENTRIES IS^MC 1 ) total in brackets, adding as a note: Various pagings ; or (b) write in the collation, v. p. meaning Various pagings. In some libraries a plus sign is used between groups, in preference to the comma. If the groups are designated by the publisher as volumes I, 2, etc. or as parts i, 2, etc. or simply numbered without any such term as volumes or parts, regard as a case of 2v. in i, 3v.in i, etc. (See section d above.) (5) Inclusive. If the publication in hand is only part of a work, being either leaves taken out of the original work or a re- print of some part, retaining the original paging, give the inclusive paging, as p. 127-153. In giving inclusive paging the Library of Congress prints both parts in full. Many libraries give only the last two figures for the second part except when the hundreds change; e. g. p. 127-53, but p. 186-214. (6) Supplied or corrected page numbers. In cases where a page number (either for inclusive or final pagination) used on the card is not given on the page in the book it should be bracketed. While it is advised that even libraries not doing minute bibliographic work should bracket "corrected" page numbers, where misunderstanding might otherwise result, it is not important that in inclusive paging they bracket "supplied" numbers, if the facts are obvious. (7) Leaves. If leaves instead of pages are numbered write f. (for folios) instead of p. On Library of Congress cards, 1. (for leaves) is used, but this seems undesirable for typewritten work, where the letter 1 and the figure 1 are identical, unless the cataloger chooses to change, by pen and ink, the type- written 1 into the script 1. (8) Columns. If columns instead of pages are numbered give the number of columns, and in brackets the number of pages, e. g. 388 col. [194P., (9) N u m b e ring omitte d. If page numbering is omitted in the book, write Unp. (meaning unpaged) in the place for pages, except that for very thin or for very rare and valuable books, the pages may be counted and the actual number given in brackets. (10) Volumes paged continuous ly. I f a work in more than one volume is paged continuously the final paging may, if desired, be given in addition to the number of volumes (e. g. 2v. 560p.) and a note added: Paged continuously. f Illustrations. (1) Specifications and a r r a n g e- 31 l5f(0-( 2 ) CATALOGING RULES m e n t. Use in the order given below the following terms in describing the illustrations of a book: 1 front., fronts. :: port., ports. '" tab., tables illus. 4 map, maps 5 diagr., diagrs. 2 pi., plates "' plan, plans G forms 1 phot., photos. facsim., facsims. (2) Definitions. The following definitions (except those for illustrations and plates, which are from the A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 15) are from the Century dictionary. Diagram: An illustrative figure giving only the outlines or a general scheme (not an exact representation) of the object; a figure for ascertaining or exhibiting certain relations between objects under discussion by means of analogous relations between the parts of the figure. Facsimile: An exact copy or counterpart; an imitation of an original in all its proportions, qualities and peculiarities. Form: A blank or schedule to be filled out by the insertion of details ; a sample or specimen document calculated to serve as a guide in framing others in like cases. Illustrations: Pictorial and other representations (plates, photographs, portraits, maps, plans, facsimiles, tables, diagrams) placed in a book or other publication, usually to elucidate the text. In a narrow sense the term stands for illustrations in the text. Map: A drawing upon a plane surface representing a part or the whole of the earth's surface or of the heavens, every point of the drawing corresponding to some geographical or celestial position, according to some law of perspective etc. which is called the projection or, better, the map-projection. 1 Not advised except for exact bibliographic work. -For most public libraries and for summer school work it is advised that what are technically "plates" but are to the average reader merely "illustra- tions'' be not separately specified as "plates," but included under "illus.," using tlie distinct specification "plates" only for books where the plates are a feature as plates, e. g. as in some scientific and art books. 3 Mention a single portrait if it is of the subject of a biography, and in other cases when it is so related to the subject of the book as to add to the value of the collation, also a single portrait when it is of the author and is contained in a book to the subject of which a portrait would not naturally be related, so that its relation to the author may he inferred, as in collected writings or in separate works in literature. 4 Specify maps, either in the text or separate, in histories and all other books where they have any significance. When a map is not bound in, but F in a pocket inside the book cover, add a note; a-, Map in pocket. 5 Do not mention plans, tables or diagrams except when numerous or important. c For forms in books on bookkeeping, business etc. 32 AUTHOR ENTRIES l5*( 2 )-( 8 ) Plan: The representation of anything drawn on a plane, as a map or chart; specifically, the representation of a building or other structure in horizontal section, as it stands or is intended to stand on the ground, showing its extent and the division and distribution of its area into apartments, rooms, passages etc. or its method of construction and the relation of its parts. Plate: A full page illustration usually printed on special (heavy) paper, one side of the leaf being blank. Plates are not as a rule included in the paging. Plates are occasionally found with a legend or brief description printed on the verso or with engravings on both sides. Portrait: A picture of a person, drawn from life, especially a picture or representation of the face. Table: (a) An arrangement of written words, numbers or signs, or of combinations of them, in a series of separate lines or columns; a formation of details in relation to any subject, arranged in horizontal, perpendicular or some other definite order, in such man- ner that the several particulars are distinctly exhibited to the eye, each by itself, (b) A synoptical statement or series of statements; a concise presentation of the details of a subject; a list of items or particulars. (3) Mention in title. Specially notable illustrations may sometimes be mentioned in the title, the name of the illustrator be- ing given, but they should also be noted in the collation, where the record would regularly be expected. (4) Few illustrations. Do not say illus. or plates, when a book has only a frontispiece or two or three unimportant pictures. (5) Number of illustrations. Give the number of plates, maps etc. when easily ascertained. When the number is given the plural form need not be used for the special kind of illus- tration, if an abbreviation for it is included in the foregoing list; e. g. 18pl, but 7 maps. (6) Colored illustrations. When the coloring of illus- trations distinctly adds to their value, prefix col. to the other specifi- cation of the illustrations. (7) M u sic. When music is printed in the text and there are no other illustrations, write in collation: illus. (music); similarly if music is printed on plates in the book and there arc no other plates, write in the collation: plates (music). When the hook con- tains musical and other illustrations in the text, or musical and other plates, or both, write in the collation respectively : illus. { inch music | or plates (inch music) or illus. (inch music) p 1 ates (inch music). ( 8 ) F it 11 e r s p e c i f ica tio n s. For more detailed specifica- tions see Library of Congress supplementary ride, in ./. /.. .'. rules, p. 52-53. 33 *5g CATALOGING RULES g Size. Give the height of the book in centimeters, exact to one-half centimeter. When books are "narrow'', "square", "oblong" or otherwise of unusual shape, give both dimensions; as, 13x16cm. (height first, width second). Measure the width from the hinge to the edge, not including the round. A book is "narrow'' if the width is less than three-fifths the height; "square" if the width is more than three-fourths the height; "oblong" if the width is more than the height. Proportions are most easily determined by the use of the Cole size card, obtainable from the Library Bureau. For illustrations and more detailed directions see A. L. A. rules, 164, and on p. 53-54 of that code the Library of Congress supple- mentary rule. Omission of size. For most public libraries and for summer school work the size specification is not advised. To very few readers do any of the methods of indicating size convey a definite idea, and of those few very few would ever be influenced in their selection of a book of the ordinary character by its size. It seems better, therefore, that, instead of the cataloger's taking the time to measure every book, only the com- paratively few books should be measured which are too large to go on the regular shelves and for which some indication of this should appear in the call number (the measuring in such cases being done by the shelf- lister) or the still fewer books which are interestingly small, the feature being in such cases brought out on the catalog cards by a note com- prehensible to the average reader. (1) Variations in a set. When the volumes of a set differ in size, if a large part of the volumes are of the same size give this as the size of the set, specifying in curves the exceptions ; as, 7v. illus. plates, 25cm. (v.6, 24cm.) ; but if a large proportion of the volumes vary, specify for the distinct volumes ; as, 7v. illus. plates ; v.1-2 and 6, 24cm.; v. 3-5 and 7, 25cm. If there are so many variations that a detailed statement would be undesirably compli- cated give only the extremes of the sizes ; as, 30v. ports. 22-25cm., unless the difference in size is so great as to divide the set on the shelves, in which case a more specific statement should be made ; as, 25v. plates, maps, 24-30cm. (v. 16 and 21-25, 26-30cm.) (2) Atlases and portfolios. If volumes of a set are accompanied by an atlas or portfolio of the same size, give e. g. 76p. illus. and portfolio of 45pl. 35cm. ; but if it is of a different size, give e. g. 2v. illus. plates, 26cm. and atlas, 29x27cm. For an alternative treatment, on the plan of supplements, see section 118 below. (3) Oversized "volumes. For treatment when the difference in size necessitates separation on the shelves see also 16tf below. 34 AUTHOR ENTRIES l6a-e 16 Call number, a Definition. The description of the book as called for above is for the publication as issued from the press. The call number, i. e. the number by which the book is called for, is the connecting link between the entry on the catalog card, and the book as shelved in the library. In most libraries it consists of the class number, showing the class or subject of the book, and the book number, i. e. the number assigned to the individual book- within the class. Thus for Fiske's History of the United States the call number is 973, the subject (United States history) being F54 indicated by 973, which is the Decimal classification number for that subject, while the individual book in the class is distinguished by F54, a combination representing Fiske, taken from the Cutter- Sanborn author table. b Position. Write the call number close to the left edge of the card, the class number on the top line and the book number directly under it and, on manuscript cards, as close to it as can be done with- out making it look crowded, in order that the two together may ap- pear as a unit. On typewritten cards any change from the ordinary single space is impracticable. In fiction it is the custom of many libraries to omit the class number, the book number alone constituting the call number. In these cases give the book number on the top line, in the place generally occupied by the class number. c Color. Call numbers may be written in black, or in red or some other distinctive color. d Letters and figures. It is better that call numbers be put on by pen rather than by typewriter, since by the former method, in the case of a long number, the size of the characters can be adapted to the space available, which is not possible on the typewriter. Also, call numbers can be made more conspicuous if put on by pen. All letters should be printed except k (to distinguish from capital EC) and 1 and q (to distinguish from the figures 1 and 9). These should be in script. Taking the ordinary lower case letter as the height of measure- ment, the capitals and the lower case b. d, f. h, k and 1 should bo two spaces high, figures and lower case t should be one and one-half spaces high, and other lower case letters one space high, except g, j, p, (j and y, which extend one space below the line. e Variations in call numbers for a set. When part of the volumes of a set, or an atlas or a portfolio so differs in size as to be shelved apart from the rest of the set give in its regular place the call 35 l6e-I7 CATALOGING RULES number for the first or principal part of the set and in a note the exceptional volumes with their own call number; e. g. supposing the main call number for the book to be 920, with v. 16 and M45 21-25 oversized, give in a note: Call no. for v. 16 and 21-25: 920, qM4 or in the case of a set with the call number 759, with an over- R24 sized portfolio, giye as a note: Call no. for portfolio: 759 qR2 If a distinctive color of ink is used for the call number in the note, the colon may be omitted before the call number. For an alternative treatment of atlases and portfolios, on the plan of supplements, see section 118 below. 17 Accession number. The accession number is the number given to a book in the order of its addition to a library and is the key to the chronologic record of additions. 1 As a connecting link between records it is convenient to have it noted on the main card for each book, but being only for official use it should be given on the back of the card. All records on the back of the card should be so written as to be easily read by tipping the card forward when locked into the drawer. For the accession number turn the card forward from the top and write the number across the end, in what is then the lower left corner (for illustration see first sample card under section 25 below) or if tracing is put on by type- writer, the accession number may (to avoid changing the position of the card in the typewriter) be typed on the back of the card in the lower left corner, in the same left-to-right direction as the tracing (see second sample card under same section). a More than one zolitmc or copy. "When the work is in more than one volume or the library has more than one copy, accession numbers should be given in the following form : 5360 v.l 14614 cop.l 5361 v.2 14615 " 2 (or) (or) 5360-61 v.l -2 14614-15 cop.1-2 It is necessary to use the first of these forms when the accession num- bers are not consecutive, and that form is preferable even when not neces- sary, as it facilitates a change in the record if a book is lost or withdrawn from the library. 1 In the New York state library it is stamped at the bottom of the first recto after the title-page. 36 AUTHOR ENTRIES I 8 18 Signature. In the cataloging of a library, as a clue to responsibility the main card and (if authority slips are made 1 ) all authority slips which carry a record of sources of information, should bear the cataloger's signature, either in full or in abbreviated form. For class work, all cards and slips should, for the convenience of the reviser, bear the signature. On cards, since they are for the use of the public, the signature should be on the back, directly under the hole when the card is tipped forward (see sample under section 25). On authority slips, which are for official use only, the signa- ture may be more conveniently both written and found, if given on the face of the card, in the upper right corner. 1 See Appendix 3 37 ig-20 CATALOGING RULES SUBJECT ENTRIES 19 Purpose. Some books, generally complete or partial col- lections of an author's writings, need only an author card, but as readers are quite as likely to be looking for material on a special subject as for the works of a special writer, those books which treat of a special subject should also have an added entry (which is defined in the A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 13, as "A secondary entry, i. e. any other than the main entry") filed under the word or phrase indicating the subject. Such cards are called subject cards or sub- ject entries, and the words or phrases under which they are filed are called subject headings. More than one subject. When a book is valuable for its treatment of more than one subject, a separate subject card should be made for each. 20 Form. The subject cards are in most respects like the author cards, the chief differences being in the addition of the sub- ject heading and in the fulness of the author's name. Sample cards Author card 373.3 TreVelyan, Sir George Otto, 1338- American revolution; new ed... Longmans, 1905 c c 1398-1905 3 3v. maps, 21cin. bart, N.Y. o 38 SUBJECT ENTRIES Subject card 20 97 3. 3 U.S. - HISTORY - REVOLUTION, 1775- 1783, jvelyan, Sir G:0: bart, 1338- American revolution; new ed. . . N.Y. Longmans, 1905 c c 1898-1905 3 3v, maps, 31cm. o SIMPLIFIED FORM Omitting .... brackets and size mark. Author card 97 3.3 Trev elyan, Sir George Otto, 1838- American revolution; new ed. Longjmans, 1905, c 1898-1905. 3v. maps. bart, N.Y, O 39 20-2lb CATALOGING RULES Subject card 913.2 U.S. - HISTORY - REVOLUTION, 1775- T8\ 1783. Trevelyan, Sir G:0: bart, 1838- American revolution; new ed. N.Y. 1 Long mans, 1905, c 1898-1905. 3v. map 8. o 21 Subject heading, a Choice of headings. Subject headings should be chosen in accordance with the following briefly stated principles, taken largely from Cutter, where a very full discus'sion of the topic may be found. An extended treatment of principles and practice, constituting the first entire book devoted to the sub- ject, is now (July 1921) being prepared for publication by Alary E. Hyde, instructor in the New York state library school, while chap- ters on the subject are also to be found in Practical handbook of modem library cataloging, by William Warner Bishop, and Cata- loging for small libraries, by Theresa Hitch'er. That term should be used as the subject heading for a book which most clearly and specifically expresses the contents of the book, as determined by a study of the title-page, preface, introduc- tion, table of contents, or the book itself. In choosing between synonymous headings preference should be given to the term (1) most familiar to the users of the library, (2) most used in other catalogs, (3) with fewest meanings other than the sense in which it is to be employed, (4) which brings the subject into the neighborhood of other related subjects. Lists of headings. The A. L. A. list of subject headings, issued in i ' j i r by the A. L. A. publishing hoard, Chicago, is designed as a guide for general use, while the list of subject headings published by the Li- brary of Congress and indicating the usage of that library is more extensive and detailed (being, tlierefore, specially adapted to very large collections) and contains also the more recent topics. b Color. In many libraries the distinction between subject and other cards in the catalog is brought out prominently by the use of red ink for subject headings. Red ink is. however, unfortunately 40 SUBJECT ENTRIES 2ib-d(3> liable to fade, and specially the red ink used on typewriter ribbons, which sometimes becomes almost invisible. For this reason the Li- brary of Congress, in its Handbook of card distribution; ./th edition, p. 84-85, recommends for typewritten headings that they he writ- ten in black, but, in order to maintain a distinguishing feature, entirely in capitals. This use of capitals, however, would not be practicable for handwritten headings, and in order to show the proper capitalization for such work the use of nil ink headings in capitals and lower case is assumed in the text throughout the follow- ing pages, the use of red ink being shown by small capitals in the place of the lower case letters which would actually be used. On the facsimile sample cards the subject headings are given in black capitals. For the sake of brevity the phrase "subject style" has, in the following pages, been adopted to cover the use of either red ink or black capitals for subject headings, while, in distinction, the usual combination of black capitals and lower case used in author headings is termed "author style." c Position. Write the subject heading on the top line, beginning at the second indention ; i. e. the inner vertical line. If the head- ing runs over the line indent subsequent lines one-half centimeter (two typewriter spaces) further to the right. d Punctuation and spacing. (1) When a subject heading of a kind which could be used in the subject relation only consists of a main heading and one or more subheads, the subheads are sepa- rated from the main heading and from each other by a dash, pre- ceded and followed by one typewriter space. In some libraries the subheads are separated from what precedes by a period, followed by one typewriter space. (2) When the heading consists of a personal name, it should take the same fulness, punctuation and spacing that it would take if it were being used in the author relation, except that if it is fol- lowed by a subdivision distinctly of a subject character, the latter should be separated from the personal part of the heading by the dash, preceded and followed by one typewriter space, while the centimeter space which would ordinarily precede distinguishing marks (e. g. titles of honor and dates of birth and death) should be omitted in order to make the personal designation appear more as a unit ; e. g. Washington, George, pres. U. S. 1732-1799 — Bibliography. (3) When the heading represents a corporate body it takes in the subject relation the same punctuation and spacing as when used in the author relation, but (as in the case of personal names) 41 2id(3)-22bl CATALOGING RULES a subhead of an exclusively subject character is separated from what goes before by a dash, preceded and followed by one type- writer space, e.g. New York (City). Fire dept — History. Exceptions. To this rule for the punctuation of corporate headings the Library of Congress makes two exceptions, i. e. Army and Navy, when used as subheads under the names of countries and states. In author headings these subbeads are separated from the name of the country or state by a period, in subject headings by a dash; e. g. Author heading: Canada. Army Subject " Canada — Army Author " Great Britain. Navy Subject " Great Britain — Navy 22 Author's name, a Position. On the line below the subject heading write the author's name, using the same indention as on author cards. b Fulness of author's name. On the author card the author's name is the first consideration and either the full form or the fullest well-known form is desirable, for purposes of identification, chiefly with a view to distinguishing authors of the same surname. On the subject card the subject heading is the first consideration, and the author is secondary. Consequently a shorter form of name may often be used, thereby saving, in the sum total, a very con- siderable amount of time, with little if any loss in the usefulness of the cards. 1 The form used on subject cards is commonly designated as be- ing of "secondary fulness" or "subject fulness." This generally consists of the author's surname (as on the author card) followed by the forename written in full when the author has only one, but by the initials of the forenames when the author has more than one. Titles of honor, dates of birth and death, etc. are used as on the author card (see \2b above). i Different degrees for secondary fulness. The form used on the subject card should always correspond to the form on the author card. The forms specified above are those commonly used for secondary fulness, but for a small library it would generally be practicable to use only the initial wben the author has but one forename, or even in a very small library to use for secondary fulness only the surname. 1 Since all the Library of Congress cards for a book are originally exactly alike, and subject cards and other added entries are made by adding the necessary headings to the original form, there is no difference in the fulness of the author's name on the various cards, but there need be no confusion through the combination with these in the catalog, of manuscript or typewritten cards, where secondary fulness is used as a measure of economy. 42 SUBJECT ENTRIES 22D2-4 2 Dates of birth and death. Dates of birth and death are often quite as important on the subject cards as on the author cards, since the value of many books (e. g. those in history, travel, science and industrial arts) would be materially affected by the period in which the writer lived. 3 Colon abbreviations for forenames. The forms listed below, taken from Cutter, p. 161, and known as "colon abbreviations", are sometimes used in catalogs, both those on cards and those in book form, (examples of the latter being the A. L. A. catalog, 1904, and the United States catalog) and are heartily recommended to the attention of catalogers on the score of the very considerable information given, at a minimum expenditure of time and space. It should be remembered, however, that while to those who know them they convey as much meaning as the names for which they stand, the great majority of the public do not know their significance and therefore in records to be consulted by the public they should be used only inhere initials would otherwise be used. In the following pages they have for the purpose of illustrating their use, been given, when applicable, in place of the initial with the period. In Mr Cutter's original list M : and U : indi- cated Mark and Ulrich, and in various places where the abbreviations are used they have been retained for those names. Men IVomen A. : Augustus A.. Anna B: Benjamin B.. Beatrice C : Charles C. Charlotte D : David D.. Delia E : Edward E.. Elizabeth F : Frederick, Frederic F.. Fanny, Fannie G : George G.. Grace H : Henry H.. Helen I : Isaac I.. Isabella J : John J.. Jane K : Karl K.. Katharine, Kate L: Louis, Lewis L.. Louise, Louisa M : Matthew M.. Mary N : Nicholas : Otto N .. 0.. Nancy Olivia P : Peter R : Richard P. . Pauline S : Samuel R.. Rebecca T : Thomas S.. Sarah U : Uriah T.. Theresa V : Victor U.. Ursula \V: William v.. Victoria X : Xavier \\\. Wilhelmina Z : Zachary Z.. Zcnobia Where : and . . are u ;ed for English forms of the names, for the Germans form ■; the ; and . , may be used, and ' ami , fur the French; • J: John, J; Jo Iiann, J. ' Jean. 4 Family names. The maiden name of a woman who is entered under her married name is (where ler name is given the author position) written in full on all cards and inc losed in ( ). Also all surnames ac- 43 22b4-25b CATALOGING RULES quired by marriage and the family names of noblemen who are entered under title are (where the names are given the author position) written in full on all cards. 5 Examples of author vs secondary fulness. Author fulness Secondary (or subject) fulness Washington, George, pres. U.S. Same Allen, James Lane Allen, J. L. Beaconsfield, Benjamin Disraeli, Same 1st earl of Macaulay, Thomas Babington Macaulay, T: B. Macaulay, Macaulay, 1st baron ist baron Cooke, Airs Rose (Terry) Same Oliphant, Mrs Margaret Oliphant Oliphant, Mrs M. O. (Wilson) (Wilson) Parsons, -Mrs Frances Theodora Parsons, Mrs F. T. (Smith) Dana (Smith) Dana 23 Title, a Position. Begin the title on the line following the author's name, indenting as on the author card. b Length. The title on subject cards may vary in length from that given on the author card ; usually in case of difference it will he longer. 1 The title may vary in length on different subject cards. It should always retain the information which is of value in connection with the special heading under which it is filed. c Oilier details. Follow the rules for title on the author card. 24 Imprint, collation and call number. Give as on the author card. 25 Tracing, a Definition. Tracing is the term used to cover the indication of entries made for a book. In its most common application it refers to the abbreviations or signs given on the main card to show the added entries (i. e. those additional cards which bear a call number) in order that all the cards for a book may he readily found if it becomes desirable to remove them from the catalog for correction or any other pnrpose. b Form. The clearest form consists of the entry word or phrase i i. e. the word or phrase used as a heading) or of some term referring to the kind of card. For the subject entries, both the main heading and the subheads should, to insure c;isv find- ing of the cards, he given in the exact form which appears in the headings on the face of the subject cards, except that perfectly obvious abbreviations may he used. For other added entry cards (specially title, editor, compiler, translator, illustrator, joint author- 1 For title-page checks see section 136, footnote 44 SUBJECT ENTRIES 25b-d and series cards) an indication of the kind of card (e. g. t for title card, ed for editor card, etc.) is often quite as clear and at the same time shorter than the entry words, but the latter should always be used when necessary to make clear the heading des- ignated. If the names of editors, translators, etc. appear on the face of the card with sufficient fulness so that the corresponding entries will be easily found in the catalog and their relation to the book is clearly shown in the title given on the cards, the ab- breviations, ed, tr, etc. are in themselves sufficient for tracing, but if the names are not given with sufficieni fulness or their relation to the book is not sufficiently clear to insure their being easily found, the surname, with either given names or initials, should be used for tracing, followed in ( ) by the appropriate abbreviation, i. e. ed, tr, etc. If cards are to be made for two or three editors or translators, etc. the tracing for the cards of the same kind may often be combined, e. g. 2 ed. Some of the most common abbreviations indicating kinds of cards are : an (for analytic) jt an ith (for joint author) comp ( " compiler) pt t ( " partial title) ed ( " editor) ser i " series) gen 2dary ( " general sec- t ( " title) ondary) tr ( " translator) illus ( " illustrator) c Position. On manuscript or typewritten cards, trace added entries on the back of the main card. Tip the card forward so that the hole for the rod to run through will be at the top of the card. Write the tracing for other cards toward what will then be the lower right corner. Calculate the space so that each entry shall stand out distinctly on a separate line, the lowest coming close to the bottom of the card. (For the tracing of several added en- tries, see the samples below.) On Library of Congress cards, where the added entries are indicated on the face of the card, near the bottom, the tracing is most easily done by placing a dot or line under the first letter of such indication, whether it be the exact heading to be used, or, e. g., the word "Title''; or in the case of title, partial title, series cards, etc. the dot or line may be placed in the body of the entry under the word by which the added entry card would be filed. Added entries not conveniently indicated in the printed matter on the face of the card should be added on the back, a^ for manuscript and typewritten cards. d Color. Some catalogers trace subject headings in red and other added entries in black, but it is questionable whether the 45 2 5d CATALOGING RULES distinction is of value in this record which is for official use only (to provide for the ready finding of the added entry cards) and of which the users are presumably of sufficient intelligence to enable them to find the cards without being told whether the heading is in red or black. Sample of back of card Manuscript tracing o i * t 2 ^ HoA3L, VTrv. Co-*iK ^) Typewritten tracing o Stn U.S. — Hist. — War of 1813 Sea power jt auth ed Brown, T:L: (gen 2dary) t pt t 6237 v.l aer 6338 v.3 Hall, J.U: (auth an) 46 SUBJECT REFERENCES 26-30a(2> SUBJECT REFERENCES 26 Definition. A "reference," as defined by the A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 15, is "a direction from one heading" to another," and is to be distinguished from an "entry," which is "the record of a book in a catalog or list." 27 Purpose. References are designed to serve as connecting links between synonymous or related terms, and are of two kinds, "see" and "see also" references. Either form may properly be made from a heading, even when there are no entries under that heading, but references should never be made to a heading under which no card will be found. 28 "See" reference. A reference from a term under which a reader might look, but which the cataloger does not intend ever to use as a heading, to the term which has been chosen to cover books on that topic; e. g. Political economy, see Economics. i The "see" reference is generally used for synonymous terms, or for terms so nearly synonymous that it is undesirable to try to separate the material. 2 For an alternative form see note 2 under 29 below. 29 "See also" reference. A reference from a term which the cataloger has used, or expects to use when the library has material to which it applies; e. g. Economics, see also Banks and bank- ing ; Factory system ; Manufactures. 1 "See also" references are made from general subjects to their sub- ordinate subjects, but not to their own subheads; e. g. Economics, see also Banks and banking; but not Economics, see also Economics — Periodicals; they are also made from subjects to related coordinate subjects; e. g. Lyric poetky, see also Songs. 2 The "see" and "see also" references are the forms in general use, but the Wisconsin library school has adopted forms which, by a fuller wording, as shown in the samples below, probably convey the idea to the public more clearly. 30 Form, a Specific references. (1) Definition. By a specific reference is meant a direct reference to a distinctly specified subject. The same reference need not be made more than once, as duplicate cards for the catalog are unnecessary. (2) Position and color. On the top line of the card, beginning at the second vertical line, write the heading from which reference is to be made, punctuating with a comma at the end unless the heading ends with an abbreviation. At the distance of one centi- 47 3oa(2)-( 4 ) CATALOGING RULES meter (four typewriter spaces) write in black cither "see" or "see also" and on the following line the heading referred to, beginning at the outer vertical line. If either the heading referred from or the heading referred to occupies more than one line begin the addi- tional line one-half centimeter (two typewriter spaces) to the right of the inner vertical line. (See also section 31 below.) (3) Additional references. Additional topics should, instead of taking new cards, be added to cards already made, as occasion arises, thus bringing together in a single place all references from one subject; but general references (see b below) may usually to advantage be kept separate from references to specific topics. (4) A r r a n g e m e n t. In specific references in a card catalog topics referred to should be arranged in a column, additional topics being added at need. The column arrangement is the clearest for a card catalog but an alter- native is the paragraph form, in which one topic follows another on the same line, separated by a semicolon. The latter form is generally used in book catalogs, for its economy of space with corresponding economy in cost of printing, while the alphabetic order generally there followed makes consultation easier than would be the case with cards, where it is im- practicable to maintain alphabetic order, owing to the need of making additions. Samples of reference cards (For the sake of compactness, in subsequent samples only so much of the card will be given as is needed to illustrate the form.) Usual form of a "see" reference ORNITHOLOGY, BIRDS see Alternative form used by the Wisconsin library school BIRDS ORNITHOLOGY. To be found in this catalog under 48 SUBJECT REFERENCES 3oa(4) For the general part of the statement on this and on the Wisconsin form given below, rubber stamps may be used or, better, in a library large enough to warrant it, the phrases may be printed on cards, in the proper position, leaving space to write in the subject words above and below. Usual form for a "see also" reference, for a card catalog LEGENDS, MYTHOLOGY FAIRY TALES FABLJES FOLKLORE ANIMAL LORE see also Alternative form for a book catalog LEGENDS, see also ANIMAL LORE; FABLES; FAIRY TALES; FOLK- LORE 1 ; MYTHOLOGY Form used by Wisconsin library school LEGENDS. Material on this subject will also be found under MYTHOLOGY FAIRY TALES FABLES FOLKLORE ANIMAL LORE 49 3ob CATALOGING RULES b General references. Frequently when the list of specific topics to which references should be made would be long and a general direction will cover it, the general reference (i. e. a reference in general terms to a certain kind of headings) is preferable; e. g. HISTORY. For history of a special country or other locality see name of the locality, subhead HISTORY; e.g. GREAT BRITAIN— HIS- TORY. For history of any subject see name of that subject, subhead HISTORY; e.g. EDUCATION— HISTORY. For subjects on which the library has few [books the subhead HISTORY may be omitted. General references should be so worded as to make the mean- ing clear and to unite the various parts grammatically and smoothly, as well as to combine satisfactorily with any introductory state- ment regarding the scope of the heading. Suggestions for forms of wording for general references (For indention see sample above.) Bibliography. For bibliography of a person or other subject see name of that subject, subhead Bibliography, as Washington, George, pres. U.S. 1732-1799 — Bibliography; or History — Bibliography. Biography. This heading is used for very general works only; e. g. works about the writing of biography, or biographic collections not limited to any special class of persons or to any special locality. For biography of a special class of persons see name of that class, as Artists ; for biography limited to a special locality see name of that locality, subhead Biography, as Ohio — Biography ; or Bos- ton — Biography; for biography of an individual see name of that individual, as Longfellow, Henry Wadsworth, 1807-1882. Composers. For lives of individual composers see names of the com- posers, as Grieg, Edvard Hagerup, 1843-1907. 50 subject references 3<>b Genealogy. For genealogy of a special locality see name of that locality, subhead Genealogy, as New England — Genealogy ; for genealogy of a special family see name of that family, as Allen family. Manners and customs. For manners and customs of any special locality see name of that locality, subhead Social life and customs, as Spain — Social life and customs. Public schools. For works on the public schools of cities, towns etc. see name of the place, subhead Public schools, as Chicago — Public schools. Teaching. For methods of teaching any special subject see name of that subject, subhead Study and teaching; as, Arithmetic — Study and teaching. Language. For works on any special language see name of that language under its local adjective, as English language. Dictionaries. For dictionaries of any language or other special subject see name of that subject, subhead Dictionaries, as Italian language — Dictionaries ; or Architecture — Dictionaries. Readers. For reading books for learning a language see name of that language under its local adjective, subhead Readers, as French language — Readers. For selections suitable for exhibitions etc. see heading Recitations and readings. Literature. For literature of a special locality see name of the literature under the local adjective, as French literature; or the name of the locality, subhead Literature, as Southern states — Liter- ature. For works of an individual writer see name of that writer, as Ruskin, John, 1819-1900. Poetry. For poetry of a special locality see name of that poetry under its local adjective, as English poetry; or the name of the 51 3ob-32 CATALOGING RULES locality, subhead Poetry, as Western states — Poetry. For works of an individual poet see name of that poet, as Arnold, Matthew, 1822-1888. English poetry. For works of an individual poet, see name of that poet, as Arnold, .Matthew, 1822-1888. American poetry. For works and collections covering both American and English poetry see entries under heading English poetry. For works of an individual poet see name of that poet, as Lowell, James Russell, 1819-1891. 31 Color in references. In all references, terms (whether re- ferred from or to) which by their nature could be used only for subjects (as, Painting) or forms of literature (as, Essays) should be written in "subject style" (see note under 21b), but headings which might be used for authors should be written in "author style." As a matter of convenience all personal names should be included under the rule for authors, even though in a few cases it may seem certain that they will never be used as author headings. This rule for the use of "author style" applies merely to headings in references. The heading for the entry of a hook should he in either "author style" or "subject style" according to the relation of the person to the hook: i. e. the name of the person should be written in "author style" when that person is the author of the book cataloged, but in "subject style" when he is the subject, as of a biography or criticism. The name of a person referred to, should, however, be in "subject style" when he is referred to strictly in the subject relation as shown in the sample card for Biography, but in "author style" when referred to as author, as in the sample for Poetry. 32 Fulness of forms. Personal names used as subject headings take the same fulness as for author headings, and when referred to in a reference should be given the exact full form used in the heading. I leadings referred to in references should be general in form if their relation to the heading referred from is general; e. g. supposing that a book with the subject heading U.S. — History — Revolution, 1775-1783, was the first book in the library with a subject card for United States, it should take at least three references, (1) North America, see also United States (because all books on the United States, whatever their subheads, would have a relation to North America) ; (2) American history, see U. S. — History (because the term American history is used as synonymous with 52 SUBJECT REFERENCES 32*35 United States history as a whole) ; (3) American revolution, see U. S. — History — Revolution, 1775-1783 (because in this case the heading referred from relates distinctly to the heading carried down to the period division). 33 Reference from subject heading to author heading. Occa- sionally reference may be made from a subject to an author head- ing; e. g. Agriculture — U. S. see also U. S. Agriculture dept ; or. Great Britain — History — Victoria, 1837-1901, see also Victoria, queen of Great Britain, 1819-1901. 34 Call numbers and tracing. Call numbers should not be given on reference cards nor should the references be traced on the catalog cards, as they refer to the subject in the abstract and not to any special book. An official list of subject headings used and references made should be kept in some form. It may generally be done by checking and annotating the A. L. A. list of subject headings or the list of the Library of Congress, but if the practice of the individual library varies widely from the printed list a separate record on cards will be more convenient. A fuller treat- ment of this topic is given in Appendix 3. 35 Filing. The question in regard to the filing of reference cards is so often asked that, while it is not a part of the cataloging itself, it has been thought well to include a statement on the sub- ject. On the principle that general or broad treatment takes precedence over special topics, general references should precede the specific. There is a difference of opinion as to whether it is better to file references before or after those entries which are filed under the same heading. If references arc filed after the entries the reader finds what material the library has on that subject, before being referred away from it to headings covering subordinate or allied subjects. On the other hand (as argued by those who advocate filing ref- erences before the entries) many readers consult first a heading not used for just the material which they desire (e. g. a general head- ing instead of a specific) and these readers must, if the references are filed at the end, look through the entries under that heading before being referred to the heading under which the desired material is to be found. Since both classes of readers can not be equally well served by cither one or the other method, it seems only fair that those who have the most knowledge of the catalog and the judgment to turn to the heading which applies to their own sub- ject should be given the first consideration and that arrangement of references after entries is therefore to be preferred. 53 35 CATALOGING RULES Assuming that references are filed after entries, a minor point is the position of the reference from a main heading alone, with re- lation to that heading combined with subheads. It is the common practice to file a reference from the main heading alone, immediately after the entries under the main heading alone, before the entries for any of the subheads, but in some libraries the references from the main heading alone are filed after all the subheads. The latter method has the advantage of giving to the reader all the material on the subject (including its various subdivisions) before referring him to a different heading. References from a main heading com- bined with a subhead are, however, filed immediately after the en- tries for that subhead. Example Texas 1 Texas — Description and travel Texas — Description and travel, see also Texas — History Texas — Occupations Texas — Social conditions Texas — Social conditions, . see also Texas — Statistics Texas, see also 1 In author style if an author heading, in subject style if a subject 54 TITLE ENTRIES 36-37C TITLE ENTRIES 36 Purpose. Along with those books which require only the author card and those, which, treating of definite subjects, need also subject cards, come many books which are likely to be known and asked for by title. For such a book a "title card" or "title entry" (defined in the A. L. A. rules as "The record of a book in the catalog under some word of the title, generally the first word not an article") should be made. This class of books consists mainly of novels, dramas and poems, and other works with specially memo- rable titles. Although title cards are often made in addition to subject cards they should be so made only when the title is sufficiently different from the subject heading to answer a separate need. If in doubt whether a title card or a subject card should be made give the preference to the subject card. 37 Form, a Position of title. Begin the title on the top line, at the inner vertical ruling. If the title runs over the line indent all subsequent lines before the author's name one-half centimeter (two typewriter spaces) further to the right, to give distinctness to the beginning of both the title and the author's name. b Length of title. The title on the title card is often shorter than on the author card, but a short subtitle or alternative title may generally be included to advantage, specially in the case of a very short main title, where the danger of confusion with another similar title is greatest. If the title of a translation is identical with the title of the original, so that the main title does not show the language of the edition in hand, this fact should be made clear, either by informa- tion retained in the title or by a note. c Marks of omission. Where full and exact cataloging is desired, the . . . should be used to indicate omissions at the be- ginning or in the midst of the title, as on the main card, but are unnecessary at the end, as the title card is used simply as the means of learning whether a specific book is in the library, and the same degree of bibliographic exactness as given on the main card is not important. The title as given on the cards should always begin with the first words of the printed title (except in the case of partial titles, to be taken up later) except that the serial number for annual reports etc., often the initial article and generally the author's name (including titles of honor, positions, etc.) may be omitted, as on the author card, and these omis- sions need not be indicated by . . . 55 37d-h CATALOGING RULES d Editors, translators etc. The names of editors, translators, etc. are generally omitted from title cards, but for books likely to appear in different editions or translations by different editors or translators there is an advantage in retaining the editor's or trans- lator's name, as an aid to the reader in case of preference. e Imprint. One centimeter (four typewriter spaces) after the title give simply the imprint date, or if there is no imprint date give whatever is substituted for it on the main card. Do not give the copyright date in addition to the imprint date. If different volumes of a set have different imprint dates give inclusive dates ; as, 1897-1904. If v.l is dated later than the first imprint date no mention need, on the title card, be made of this fact, even if given on the main card. f Collation. One centimeter (four typewriter spaces) after the date give merely the number of volumes if more than one. For works bound in a greater or less number of volumes than the num- bering of the publisher see section 15^(2) above. On full-entry cards (i. e. author and subject cards) the collation is written on the line below the imprint, but on the short-entry cards (which include all cards except author and subject) the imprint and collation consist of merely the date and number of volumes, and it seems undesirable to give to the latter a separate line. g Author's name. On the line after the title etc. write the author's name, in secondary fulness, using the same indention as on the author card. Here, and on all other added entry cards, the author's name is a second- ary consideration (as explained in connection with the subject card) and a shortened form may therefore be used. On short-entry cards, however, hereditary and other personal titles should be used, as on the author and subject cards, but dates of birth and death are less important than on those cards and their use on short-entry cards is not advised. // Call 11 umber. Give call number in the regular place. Sample cards Author card Tbtbv Thao|keray, William Makepeace, 1311- 1863. (The) Virginians: a tale of the last Le.the 18th a oenturyj with. .. Illustra- tions by the author... Boat, Houghton, 1898,c c, 89j 2v, illus. 20-jjcm. 56 TITLE ENTRIES 37 On the back of the main card should be written the accession numbers, and t to trace the title card. If typewriters lack the character l / 2 , the decimal .5 may be used instead. Title card T363v (The) Virginians: a tale of the last c i.e.the 18th 3 century. 1896. 2v. rhaokeray, W:M. SIMPLIFIED FORM Omitting . . . , brackets (except in title) and size mark. Author card T34£ tfoliere, Jean Baptiste Poquelin, 1622- 1673. Dramatio worksjtr. into English prose, with notes, by Charles Heron Wall. Lond|. Bell, 1376-77. 3v. port. 1 Translator and editor card Same form as for full cataloging given above. 61 43-43C CATALOGING RULES ILLUSTRATORS ETC. 43 Illustrators. Enter books consisting solely ol illustrations, or illustrated works of which the illustrations are the chief feature, under the illustrator or designer. In the latter case make added entry" under the author of the text. If the illustrations are second- ary in importance to the text, the book is to be entered under the name of the author, with added entry under the name of the illus- trator. In doubtful cases enter under the author of the text, with added entry under the illustrator. A. L. A. rules, 4. a 'Main entry under illustrator. Books covered by the first part of this rule, i. e. "books consisting solely of illustrations, or illustrated works of which the illustrations are the chief feature", are comparatively rare, and when encountered the main card (made under the name of the illustrator) does not differ in its form from the ordinary author card, e. g. 74-1 Gibalon, Charles Dana, 1867- Gibson new cartoons... N.Y. Scrib- ner,| 1916. 8pl. 31cm. b Added entry under illustrator. Books covered by the second part of the rule, i. e. those in which "the illustrations are secondary in importance to the text"', constitute a vastly larger proportion of published works, and for these as stated in the rule given above, the main entry is made under the author of the text, with added entry for the illustrator, and it is with reference to these added en- tries that the term "illustrator card" is generally used. c Importance of illustrator. Illustrator cards are used much less freely than editor and translator cards, being made only when the illustrator himself or the illustrations of the book in hand are considered specially important. Except when important the name of the illustrator need not be included in the title on the main card, even though it is on the title-page, but when included it should fol- low the same rules as for editors, \3g. 1 In the form of a "general secondary" entry, described below under section 46. 62 ILLUSTRATORS ETC. 43d-44 d Form for illustrator card. Follow the rules for editor cards, except for the substitution of illus. one centimeter after the name, in place of ed. in the heading. Main entry under author of text DIG Davis, Richard Harding, 1864-1916. About Paris; illustrated by Charle3 Danai Gibson, N.Y. Harper, 1395. pi9p. 28pl. 18-Jcra. Added entry under illustrator (i. e. "illustrator card") *>\4A^€> bibson, Charles Dana, 1867- D*6 illus. Davis, R:H. Aoout Paris. 1895. 44 Binders, publishers, reporters. Occasionally a library may wish to make an added entry for a book under the name of a famous binder, a publisher by whose name the book is known, or for the reporter of a trial. In such a case the added entry may be made in the form of an editor card, by substituting for the abbreviation ed. the applicable term, i. e. binder, pub., or reporter. 63 45-46 CATALOGING RULES GENERAL SECONDARY ENTRIES 45 Definition. Entries made for individuals, societies, govern- ment departments, etc., having some kind of author connection with tlie book, important enough to warrant recognition, yet not really that of author nor such as can be readily defined by a single word, as "editor," "translator", etc. A general secondary may be made, for example, for a society or de- partment to which a report is made or which authorizes a publication, or for an individual on whose writings the work in hand is based, as in the case ot material rewritten or adapted (see sample below). 1 This must not be confused with an abridgment, in which the author's own words are retained, the alteration consisting chiefly in omissions. For an abridgment the author heading should be the same as for the original work, the abridger being regarded as an editor. A general secondary card is of special value in case of doubt as to which of two headings should be used for the main entry. With Library of Congress cards, general secondary entries are used very freely, when the name under which the added entry is made appears in the title, even to the extent of applying the method to material which, strictly speaking, is ana- lytic in nature (e. g. prefaces and introductions) when the object of the entry is merely to represent the work of that writer, rather than to catalog that distinct part of the book. 46 Treatment. Same -plan as for editor cards (section 42), except that no term corresponding to "ed." is used in the heading and since the relation of the party named in the heading is not thus defino 1, sufficient information to justify entry under the head- ing should be included either in the title or in a note. Tracing. In the case of editors, translators, etc. the facts are usually evident from the face of the card, so that the abbreviations ed., tr., etc. are sufficient for tracing, but "general secondary" is from its very scope an indefinite phrase and it is therefore- best to trace entries of this kind by writing on the back of the card the heading for the entry (or as much of it as is necessary for ready identification) and after it in curves the abbreviation gen 2dary; e. g. for the case below: . J. L; K 2dary) W; K. i '. Ingle work rewritten or adapted will be tal with dramatizations, section [i 64 GENERAL SECONDARY ENTRIES 46 Sample cards Author card Bvfc Baldwin, James, 1841- Fairy reader; adapted from Grimm and Andersen. N.Y. Amer.bk co. c c 1905 3 190p. illus. 19om. General secondary card BtS [Jrimm, c Jakob Ludwig Karl 3 1785- 1863. Baldjwin, James. Fairy reader; adapted from Grimm and Andepsen. c c 1905 3 (Corresponding card for [Grimm, Wilhelm Karlj 1786-1859, and for Andersen, [Han- Christian-, 1805-1875) SIMPLIFIED FORMS Author card Omitting brackets in imprint, with consequent substitution of period at end of imprint, and omitting size mark from the collation. Baldwin, James, 1841- Fairy reader; adapted from Grimm and Andersen. N.Y. Amer.bk 00. c 1905. 190p. illus. 65 46 CATALOGING RULES General secondary card Omitting brackets in heading and imprint, with consequent substitution of comma after name in heading (or of period, if dates are not used) and of period at end of imprint. 33 S. 2 Blfc arimm, Jakob Ludwig Karl, 1785- 1363. Baldwin, James. Fairy reader; adapted from Grimm and Andersen. c 1905. It is hoped that sufficient samples have now been given to show that the variations from full cataloging which are recommended for simpler cataloging consist mainly of the omission of brackets everywhere except in title (or in collation if the paging as given on the cards differs from the publisher's final main pagination) the omission of the . . . and the omis- sion of the size mark. It is recommended also that "illus" be substituted for the more specific "pi." (except when the plates are a distinct feature as plates; e. g. in some scientific and art books) and occasionally a shorter title may be used. From this time, therefore, simplified forms will not be given, unless in some case bringing out a special point. 66 notes: miscellaneous 47-49 NOTES: MISCELLANEOUS For series notes see sections 65-69. 47 Scope and order. Add notes when necessary to explain the title 1 or to correct any misapprehension to which it might lead, and also to supply essential information about the author and bib- liographical details not given in the title, imprint or collation. Notes are to be in English, except quotations from foreign sources, which are to be given preferably in the original. The source of the quotation is always to be specified, and the original punctuation, spelling, etc. to be preserved, even if it conflicts with other ruling. Notes may be used to cover the following points : bibliographies, authorities, etc., pseudonyms and anonyms, sequels, variations in title, editors and translators, editions, various places, publishers or dates, reprints, languages of the text, source of the book if first published serially, no more published, imperfections in copy, bound with something else. A. L. A. rules, 168. For order of notes generally used on Library of Congress cards see A. L. A. rules, p. 56. 48 Where given. Notes should be given on the cards where most useful ; e. g. notes regarding the author should be given on the author card ; bibliographies which, as is generally the case, con- cern the subject should be given on the subject card; notes showing the language of a book, when not indicated by the title, should be given on author, subject and title cards; notes of imperfections should be given on all cards. 49 Form. Notes should be definite and concise, and those concerning the contents of a book (e. g. a biographical sketch or a bibliography) should when practicable include the page references ; as, Bibliography, p. 436-453 ; or, Biographical sketch of the author, pref. p. [l]-27. Page references are, for ease in reading, preferably given in arabic, even when roman numerals are used in the book; e. g. pref. p. 34-77, rather than p. xxxiv-lxxvii. Chapter headings for bibliographies etc. are generally to be preferred, but when there is no chapter heading or when it does not cover the situation satisfactorily, occasionally a general term or other sup- plied phrase may be used to advantage. For sample cards containing notes see sections under later topics. 1 Notes indicating the dates covered by works of history or travel are, when the information is not given elsewhere on the card, specially valuable; also notes furnishing for a translation the title of the original work, when this is not obvious from the title of the translation. 67 50-52 CATALOGING RULES 50 Sequels and supplements. Notes of sequels should refer both to earlier and later volumes in the sequence, making the order clear. When any work is followed by a supplement which calls for a separate main entry ; e. g. a continuation under a different author (see A. L. A. rules, 14) or one in periodical form, connect- ing notes should be given on the cards tor both the original work and the supplement. 51 Position. In general omit one line after the regular entry, before miscellaneous notes, if there is room to do so without carry- ing the writing too far down on the card or necessitating the use of an extra card. 52 Indention. Begin each note at the inner indention, but use outer indention for subsequent lines. 68 JOINT AUTHORS JOINT AUTHORS 53 Definition. A person who writes a book in collabora- tion with one or more associates, the portion written by each not usually being specified. A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 15. 54 Treatment. Three important methods in somewhat general use are shown below. Method 1 is a slight amplification of A. L. A. rules, 2, while Method 3 is the one most easily ap- plied in connection with the use of Library of Congress cards. The relative advantages of the various methods are discussed in sec- tion 55. a Method i. (1) Books by two or three authors. For a book written jointly by two or three authors (including cor- respondence) make the main entry under the name of the one first mentioned on the title-page, followed by the name of the second or the names of the second and third. Make added entries in which each of the additional authors is given the first place on the card, and the author given first on the main card is given the second place. Use the inverted form for each name included in the head- ing. For the name used first in each heading give author fulness with personal titles (and dates of birth and death, if it is the prac- tice of the library to use them) ; for the other names use secondary fulness with personal titles, but not dates of birth and death. Be- gin each joint author heading at the outer indention ; if the head- ing runs over the line indent subsequent lines one-half centimeter (two typewriter spaces) to the right of the second vertical line. Use brackets according to previous rules. Examples: Stevenson, Robert Louis, and Osbourne, Lloyd. Osbourne, Lloyd, and Stevenson, R. L : Cheston, Henry Clifford], Gibson, J. S. and Tim- merman, C: E. Gibson, J. Stewart, Cheston, 11:1' and Tim- merman, C : E. Timmerman, Charles E., Cheston, H:C. and Gibson, J. S. ( examples with dales ) Stevenson, Robert Louis, 1850-1894, and Osbourne, Lloyd. Osbourne, Lloyd, l£ and Stevenson, R.L: 69 54a(i)i-3a CATALOGING RULES i Number of authors in heading. Provision is made in the direction above for the use of three names in the heading, in order that the form for any number of names may be understood, but unless a library has already adopted the use of three or more names it is recommended that the A. L. A. rule for two names only in the heading be followed, except in a case where another author is of special importance. 2 Punctuation. Notice that to distinguish clearly the different authors, the comma is needed between the names of joint authors not connected by "and," even though the preceding name ends with a period, bracket or curve; also that the comma is used before the "and" unless the preceding name ends with a period, bracket or curve, when the appearance seems to justify its omission. 3 Exceptions, a When two authors always write jointly, reference may be made from the second to the first, instead of an added entry be- ing made for each book; as, Chatrian, Alexandre, 1826-1890, and Erckmann, Emile, see Erckjmann, rimile, 1823-1899, and Chatri- an, Alexandre (or) this E*mi Chatrian, Alexandre, 1826-1890. Books by this author will be found in catalog under the heading: Erokmann, e, 1822-1899, and Chatrian, Alexandre. Similar references may be made in any instance of joint authorship, but if this is done, in case the second form is used and the author from whom reference is made appears in one book as second to one author and in another book second to another, the headings to which reference is made should be listed one under another. The reference method, however, re- quires every reader who looks under the author given second on the title- page to look in two places before finding the book and therefore the treat- ment by added entry for the second author is in most cases preferable. For the second of these forms it is recommended that a card be used on which is printed the phrase, "Books by this author will be found in this catalog under the heading". This phrase should be printed far enough down on the card to allow for the name referred from to be written in above, and it is also recommended that for the printed phrase the third and second indentions be used and that the name referred to be written below, begin- ning at the first indention, with third indention for subsequent lines when 70 JOINT AUTHORS 54a(i)3a-(3> needed. If more than one heading is referred to the letter "s" should be added by pen to the word "heading". If the second form is used and the writer referred from has, besides his secondary joint author work, other work for which the main entry is made under his name (either alone or as the first of two or more joint authors) the word "also" should be inserted in the reference phrase, so that this will read "will also be found". If the library has, at the time of making the reference, no such main entry, it is recommended (contrary to the custom with "see also" subject references) that the "also" be not inserted till the library actually has such main entry, leaving it to the person who files the cards to note when this should be done; such main entry work might come into existence later. b For joint authorship of corporate bodies, e. g. societies or govern- ment departments, Method 2 given below is to be preferred, to avoid the complicated headings likely to result otherwise. (2) Books by more than three authors. For a book written jointly by more than three authors make the main entry under the name of the first, followed by the phrase "and others", e. g. Grant, Russell Andrew, and others. Added entry may be made for each additional author but, unless a library is trying to keep a complete record of its material by all authors, is important only in exceptional cases, e. g. when the additional author is of special im- portance from either the general or the local standpoint or for some other reason is specially likely to be looked for. If an added entry is made it would take the form : Storrs, Martin Lee, Grant, R. A. and others, giving the names of only the author for whom the entry is being made and of the author given on the main card. If in the case of a book by more than three joint authors only two or three are named treat as in the case of two or three joint authors except for the use of the phrase "and others" after the names. Brackets are not used around the phrase "and others" in the heading. If the A. L. A. rule (naming in the heading not more than two authors) is in general followed, the rule given above may be made to apply by changing "three" to "two", only that if in an exceptional case it is desired to specify three authors the form used should then follow that given under (i). (3) Title on main card. The title on the main card follows the rules previously given for main cards. When the names of all the authors are given in the heading they need be repeated in the title only in unusual cases, according to the principle for writ- ing titles under single authors. When the authors are not all men- tioned in the heading (as in the case of more than three) their names may, if thought advisable, be included in the title (without inversion, in title-page fulness) or in a note or contents, the advisa- bility of this being determined by the number of the authors and their importance. 71 54a(3)i-(6) CATALOGING RULES 1 When there are too many authors to warrant a complete list, give the name of only the first or the name of the first and a selection of the most important of the others, accounting for the remainder by adding at the end of the names mentioned, the phrase "and others", using brackets for this phrase if the information is given in the title on the cards and the phrase is not on the title-page. The author heading often covers the case sufficiently to make any accounting in the title unnecessary. 2 When the authors' names are not all included in the heading and are omitted either wholly or in part from the title, in exact cataloging such omissions should be indicated in the title on the cards by . . . for each omission, whether of a single name or of two or more consecutive names. 1 4 1 Title on added entry joint author cards. The title on added entry joint author cards (i. e. entries for second and third authors) should be given briefly, following rules for added entry editor cards (section 42c). (5) Imprint and collatio n. The imprint and collation are given on the main card as on other main cards ; on added entry joint author cards they follow the rules for added entry editor cards (section A2d I . (6) Subject, title, editor c a r d s, e t c. These bear the same relation to the main card as in the case of a single author. Samples of Method 1 ( The following entries for a book for whose authors the dates were not available will serve as samples of forms used in libraries which do not make a practice of giving dates. Libraries which do make a prac- tice of giving dates should leave space for the dates after the name of the author written first on each author card (including added entry joint author cards) and subject card, but not on other cards.) Main card ^15 Allen, Thomas Gaskell, and 3achtleben, A43 W:L: Aoroes Asia on a bioyole: the journey of tlwo American students from Constanti- nople to Peking. N.Y. Century, 1903 c c 1894r, 234p. illua. port. 19jom. 72 JOINT AUTHORS Subject card 54a-b(4) &\5 A4S ASIA— DESCRIPTION AND TRAVEL. Allen, T:G. arid Saohtleben, W:L: Across Asia on a bicycle: the journey of two American students from Constanti- nople to Peking. N.Y. Century, 1903 ci8S)4 : 234p. illus. port. 19-^cm. Added entry joint author card M2> Sachftleben, William Lewis, and Allen, T:G. Across Asia on a bicycle. 1903. Title card *\5 A*3 Across Asia on a bicyole. 1903. Allejn, T:G. and Saohtleben, W:L: Briefer cataloging. The only changes to be made in the cards above, to adapt them to the briefer cataloging, are the omission on the main author and on the subject card, of the brackets around the copyright date (substituting a comma for the first bracket and a period for the second) and the omission of the indication of size. b Method 2. (1) Heading for main card. Make the main entry for the book under the name of the author first men- tioned on the title-page, giving his name only in the heading, with author fulness and such distinguishing marks (i. e. titles and dates) as are regularly used in author headings. (2) Title on main card. Under this method include in the title ('without inversion, in title-page fulness) the names of the authors if not more than three. For more than three authors fol- low for title the rule under .Method 1. (3) Added entry joint author cards. For the added entry joint author cards give as the heading I , itli dis- tinguishing marks) of only the additional am' !, in- cluding the authors' names in the titl< I m pri nt a ml coll a t ion. 73 54b CATALOGING RULES Samples of Method 2 Main card 3\5 A4b of nop and Cen lletn, Thomas Gaskell. Across Asia on a bicycle: the journey two American students from Constanti- le to Peking; by Thomas Gaskell Allen William Lewis Saohtleben. N.Y. tury, 1903 c ci894 3 334p. illus. port. 19iom. Subject card S15 A43 ASIA - DESCRIPTION AND TRAVEL. Allen, T:G. Aoross Asia on a bicycle: the journey of t|wo American students from Constanti- nople to Peking; by Thomas Gaskell Allen and William Lewis Sachtleben. N.Y. Centaury, 1903 c c 1894 3 234p. illus. port. 19-J-cm. (or as in Method i) (See note preceding card on p. 72) A43 ASIA— DESCRIPTION AND TRAVEL. Allejn, T:G. and Sachtleben, W:L: Aoross Asia on a bicycle: the journey of t!wo American students from Constant i- noplle to Peking. N.Y. Century, 1903 ! 1894, 234p. illus. port. 19-^cm. 3\5 A4S Added entry joint author card Sacbjtleben, William Lewis. 'Across Asia on a bicycle... by Thomas Gaskell Allen and 7/illiam Lewis Sachtle- ben.] 1903. 74 JOINT AUTHORS Title card 54b-c(3) A43 Across Asia on a "bicycle. . .by Thomas Gaskell Allen and William Lewis Sachtleben. 1903. Allen. T:G. (or J A43 Across Asia on a bicycle. Alle|n, T:G. Across Asia on a bicycle... by Thomas Gaskell Allen and William Lewis Sachtle- ben. 1903. (or as in Method i) 3V5 A45 Across Asia on a bicycle. 1903. Allejn, T:G. and Sachtleben, W:L: Briefer cataloging. To adapt these forms to the briefer cataloging, omit on the main author card and on the subject card the brackets around the copyright date (substituting a comma for the first bracket and a period for the second) and omit the indication of size; on the added entry joint author card and the title card substitute a comma for the three dots in the title. c Method 3. (1) Main entry. Make the main entry under the name of the first author, as in Method 2, following the same rules for title, imprint and collation. (2) Added entry joint author cards. Make the added entry joint author cards according- to the rules for added entry editor cards (section 42), except that "joint author" is substituted in the heading for the abbreviation "ed." (3) O t h e r added entries. As indicated by samples for Method 2. 75 54C-55b(2)(b) CATALOGING RULES Sample of Method 3 (Main card, subject card and title card as in Method 2) Added entry joint author card (See note preceding card on p. 72) 315 A43 Sachtleben, William Lewis, joint author. Alleb, T:G. Across Asia on a bicycle. 1903. 55 Relative advantages and disadvantages of different methods, a Method 1. (1) Advantages, (a) Represents in the heading the authorship as it appears on the title-page. (b) Avoids the necessity for repeating the authors' names in the title. (2) Disadvantages, (a) Produces a complication in alphabeting. Headings in which more names than one appear may either be arranged in a separate alphabetic group after the entries in which the first author's name is given alone, e. g. the cards for Besant, Sir Walter, and Rice. James, after the works of Besant, Sir Walter, alone; or the works by joint authors ma} 1 be alphabeted in with the works of the author alone ; e. g. Besant, Sir Walter, and Rice, James. Chaplain of the Fleet, between Besant, Sir Walter. Captain Cook, and Besant, Sir Walter. Children of Gibeon. By the former arrangement the reader may look for the book in the first series of titles and overlook the fact that there is a second; by the latter arrangement the reader who is accustomed to finding the joint authors arranged after the single authors may think, on seeing a joint author card, that he has reached the end of the works hy the single author. Of the two arrangements confusion seems less likely to result from the second. (&)Makes spacing difficult in the case of affixed titles and dates of birth and death. b Method 2. (1) A d v a n ta ge. Simplifies the alphabeting and illg. I v a 11 t a g e s. I a) If only one name is given in the the book- is not so readily identified by the reader who - it by the na or three authors. ry card, if the joint autho to be represented, I the author- must cither be included in the title, which nucli re] >e for added entry cards the catal 76 JOINT AUTHORS 55M2)(b)-c(2) (c) must revert to Method 1, and represent the joint authorship on the author line. c Method 3. (1) A d vantages, (a) Simplifies the alphabet- ing and spacing. (b) Is best adapted to printed cards, where all cards are origi- nally exactly alike. (2) Disadvantages, (a) Represents all the authors ex- cept the first in a subordinate relation, like editors, translators etc. (b) Results in the arrangement of the added entry joint author cards in a second series of titles among the works of those authors as editors, translators etc. where the cards are likely to be entirely overlooked by the reader who looks for the book under the name of a second or third author, (c) Also as in b{2). 77 56-59e CATALOGING RULES NAME REFERENCES 56 When made. References should be made to the exact form chosen for entry, from any other form under which the reader is likely to look, unless the difference is so slight as to be unlikely to affect the place of the card in the catalog. Some of the most important classes of references are noted below, but many others will come up from time to time, to which the general principle will apply. 57 Fulness. The form referred to should be in author fulness, including personal titles, and dates of birth and death (if used in author headings) but excluding such terms as ed., tr. etc. which have nothing to do with the person considered by himself but merely show his relation to a special book. Brackets should not be used in references except in very unusual cases, e. g. a corporate entry in which some explanatory term has been introduced ; as, Albany, N. Y. St Peter's [Episcopal] church. Forms referred from need not include dates if these are given in the forms referred to, except when needed to distinguish. 58 Color. Use "author style" for all name references. 59 Examples, a Noblemen entered under title ; e. g. Avebury, John Lubbock. 1st baron, with reference from Lubbock, John, 1st baron Avebury {A. L. A. rules, S3) b Noblemen entered under family name ; e. g. Walpole, Horace, 4th earl of Orford, with reference from Orford, Horace Walpole, 4th earl of (A. L. A. rules, Jj) c Married women who are entered under the married name but have also published books under either the maiden name, e. g. Ward, Mrs Elizabeth Stuart (Phelps), with reference from Phelps, Elizabeth Stuart ; or under an earlier married name, e. g. Parsons, Mrs Frances Theodora (Smith) Dana, with reference from Dana, Airs Frances Theodora (Smith), also from Dana, Mrs William Starr, and from Parsons, Mrs James Russell, jr (A. L. A. rules, 41) d Married women whose books are regularly published under an earlier form, either the maiden name, e. g. Potter, Margaret Horton, with reference from Black, Mrs John Donald; or an earlier married name, e. g. Wiggin, Mrs Kate Douglas (Smith), with reference from Riggs, Mrs George Christopher {A. L. A. rules, 41) e Compound surnames, which are generally to be entered under the first part with reference from the second; e. g. Watts-Dunton, 78 NAME REFERENCES 59e-J Theodore, with reference from Dunton, Theodore Watts- (A. L. A. rules, 25) In many libraries and reference books the opposite practice prevails. / Unused forenames; e. g. Conradi, Bruno, with reference from Conradi, Karl Paul Bruno (A. L. A. rules, 28) g Full name with reference from familiar shorter form; e. g. Matthews, James Brander, with reference from Matthews, Brander h Changed names; e. g. Stretton, Hesba, with reference from her original name, Smith, Hannah (A. L. A. rules, 40) i Variant spellings of either forenames or surnames ; e. g. Karl, or Carl; Turgenev, or Tourgueneff. Names pronounced alike but differently spelled by their owners should be connected by "see also" references under each spell- Braun, see also Brown, and Browne Brown, see also BraUn, and Browne Browne, see also Brau|n, and Brown ; Modified vowels {A. L. A. rules, 131) For the modified vowels a general reference is sometimes used; e. g. Ba Names beginning Ba and Bae are arranged to- gether as Bae. 79 593-k CATALOGING RULES While this method is recognized as a possibility it is not advised, as a reader who was looking for Barmann would not be likely to see a reference under Ba, which would be filed at the beginning of the Ba's. A specific reference from each name will be found much more satisfactory. k Surnames with prefixes {A.L.A. rules, 26) Under very common prefixes a general reference may be made; e. g. De Foreign names beginnin g with this prefix will be font d in this catalog under the latter part of the name. This suggestion is, however, open to the same criticism as that for the modified vowels above. Sample references Instead of the following "see" references the same form may be used as suggested for "see" subject references under section 30, or for pseudonyms in section 87. Lubbock, John, see Avetjury, John Lubbock, 1834-1913 1st baron Avebury, 1st baron, Orford, Horace Walpole, 4th earl of, see Walpole, Horace, 4th earl of Orford, 1717-1797 Phelps, Elizabeth Stuart, see Ward, Mrs Elizabeth Stuart (Phelps) 1344-1911 80 NAME REFERENCES 59 Blaok, Mr3 John Donald, see Potter, Margaret Horton, 1881- Gbthe, iGoethe see (or) Go the, Johann Wolfgang von, see Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1749- 1332 duller. See this name arranged as though written Mueller (JO) Miiller, Friedrich Max. See this name arranged as though writlten Mueller, Friedrioh Max References from modified vowels are to be arranged with the same vowels unmodified, while in headings for entries a, 6 and ii are arranged as though written ae, oe and ue. (See Cutter, 299.) The possibility that a name with a modified vowel may be used in the two forms for different persons may be recognized on a guide card, having both names given at the top, e. g. Mueller or Muller 81 60-63 CATALOGING RULES COMPILER, EDITOR OR TRANSLATOR AS AUTHOR 60 Main entry. Enter composite works and collections of independent works, essays, etc. by various authors under the com- piler, editor or translator, individual or corporate. 1 Based on A. L. A. rides, 126; for examples and more detailed direc- tions see also that rule and its accompanying fine print. 2 Under this principle are generally included bibliographies, cyclopedias, dictionaries, genealogies, and collections of poems, essays, stories etc. by numerous writers, when some known individual is evidently responsible for the book as a whole. 3 For the distinction between compiler and editor see definitions, sec- tion 38. See also definition of author in Cutter, p. 14. Generally compiler is used for makers of bibliographies, dictionaries and genealogies; editor for cyclopedias; either compiler or editor for collections of poetry or prose, according to whether the work has been merely collecting or has included also editorial work in the way of notes, important introductions etc. Translator is used where the maker of a collection has also translated it into a different language. While these suggestions cover in a general way the use of the terms it is usually best in choosing to be guided by the phraseology of the title-page unless there is strong reason to the con- trary, but remembering that the maker of such works as indicated above is generally regarded as something else than an author, even though not specifically designated on the title-page. 61 Treatment of name. When the main entry is made under the name of a compiler, editor or translator, this name is treated on all cards, in every respect (i. e. indention, fulness etc.) as though it were the name of the author of the book, except that in the case of persons (but not of corporate bodies) it is followed after one centimeter space by the abbreviation comp., ed. or tr. as the case requires. (See A. L. A. rules, 57.) Except in some name references, all names used in headings on the cards, (except the second and third authors in a joint author heading) whether representing author, compiler, editor, illustrator, translator, general second- ary or subject, are written in author fulness, including personal titles (and dates of birth and death, if used on author cards), in order that the form may be identical with that used for the same person if he appears as author. 62 Title, imprint, collation etc. For both main and added entry cards, follow the same directions as for books of simple authorship. 63 Compiler etc. in the secondary relation. For treatment in the secondary relation, in contrast with the treatment as author described above, see sections 38-42. 82 COMPILER, EDITOR OR TRANSLATOR AS AUTHOR 60-64 64 Joint compilers etc. as authors. Treat as in the case of joint authors except for the use of the abbreviation comp., ed. or tr. at the end of the heading. If more than one name is used in the heading (Method 1 for joint authors) write the abbreviation one centimeter after the combination of names ; not after the first alone. Notice the difference in treatment between two or more compilers or editors etc. as authors (in which case they follow whatever method is used for joint authors) and two or more editors etc. in the secondary relation (section 41), where they are regularly treated separately. Sample cards Main card, showing use of hereditary title and date of birth 8>2\.0& Doug laSj Sir George [Brisbane Scottj DT3 bart-, 1856- ed. Book of Scottish poetry; being an anthology of the beat Scottish verse from the earliest times to the present. Lond . Unwin, 1911. 929p. 19om. Corresponding subject card B2\.0fc ! 1 SCOTTISH POETRY— COLLECTIONS. D73 Doug las, Sir G: C B.S. 3 bart, 1856- ed. Book of Scottish poetry; being an anth ology of the best Scottish verse from the earliest times to the present. Lond . Unwin, 1911. 929p. 19cm. 83 60-64 CATALOGING RULES Main card for joint compilers, treated according to Method 1 for joint authors When Method 2 or Method 3 for joint authors is used, instances of joint compilers etc. as authors should conform to the same method. f ■ Ml4 MoFajdden, Elizabeth A#thorpj 1875- and Davie, L.E. comp. (Selected list of plays for amateurs and Students of dramatic expression in schools and colleges... Cin. E.A.Mc- Faddjen, 1908. 96p. 23jcm. Corresponding subject card 0\5?>c Four boys in the land of cotton. TG5°>f Four boys and a fortune. c c 1910j T2 PAINTINGS - REPRODUCTIONS. Correggio, c Antonio Allegri 3 known as, 1494-1534. Oeuvres completes du Correge, et choijx du Parmesan. Par. Didot c 1864 3 19p. 123pl. 31-Jom. (Galerie des peirjtres les plus celebres) 115 86-90 CATALOGING RULES 14 Reference from family name Allegri, Antonio, see Corrjeggio, Antonio Allegri, 1494-1534 (or) 15 known as, Allegri, Antonio. fforks by this artist will be found in this catalog under the heading: Correg- gio, Antonio Allegri, known as, 1494-1534 116 ANONYMOUS BOOKS 91-923(2) ANONYMOUS BOOKS 91 Definitions. A book is considered anonymous if the author's name does not appear in the book itself. A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 13. Published without the author's name. Strictly a book is not anonymous if the author's name appears anywhere in it, but it is safest to treat it as anonymous if the author's name does not ap- pear in the title. Even when the author's name is given in the second or a later volume the work is to be treated as anonymous if the first volume does not give the author's name. Note that the words are "in the title," not "on the title-page." Sometimes in government publications the author's name and the title of his work do not appear on the title-page but on a page immediately follow- ing. Such works are not to be treated as anonymous. Cutter, p. 13. 92 Treatment. Anonymous books fall into two classes: (a) those of which the authors are known, and (b) those of which the authors are unknown. The general treatment of anonymous books is described below. For titles changed in successive volumes, see A. L. A. rules, us; for different spellings of the first word of the title (e. g. "inquiry" and "enquiry"), for related anonymous works and for translations of anonymous works, see A. L. A. rules, 116-118. a Author known. The treatment of an anonymous book whose author is known does not differ in the form of the cards from the treatment of books as previously considered, the main entry being made under the author's name and (in exact work) such parts of the name bracketed as are not given in the title of the book, in the case of anonymous books the brackets being placed around the entire name. Exception: For sacred books, anonymous classics and corporate headings, to be treated later, brackets are not used to show that the name is not given in the title of the book. (1) Identifying phrases. Phrases in the title of the book, identifying the author, may be included in or omitted from the title on the cards for books of which the author is known, ac- cording to the cataloger's judgment as to their importance. Although these phrases represent the author's name and informa- tion about the author, it is better (in exact work) to use ... to indicate their omission either wholly or in part. (2) Title card s. Title cards should be made in all cases. When the author's name is not in the title of the first volume of a set, but is in that of one of the other volumes, make both author and title entries but do not inclose the author's name in brackets. 117 92b(l)-C CATALOGING RULES b Author unknown. (1) Main entry. The treatment of anonymous books of which the author is not known does not differ in principle from that in previous work. Since the author's name is unknown it is obviously impossible to make the main entry under his name, but the top line, being the regular place for his name, is left blank (except for the call number) in order that the name may be filled in later if found. The title is written in its regular place on the second line, beginning at the second indention, and as this is the main card, the regular rules for title, imprint and collation for main cards are followed, accession numbers and tracing being given on the back. (2) Added entries. Added entry cards ; i. e. for subjects, editors etc. are made as usual, leaving a blank line in the regular place for the author's name, except on series cards and inside the ( ) in analytics (to be taken up later). (3) Identifying phrases. Phrases in the title of the book, furnishing a clue to the author's identity, should be included on the cards for books of which the author is not found; e. g. "by a member of Congress", "by the author of ". If several books are mentioned as the work of the author, only the first or the best known need be given on the cards, the other titles being represented (in exact work) by . . . (4) Author found after book is cataloged. If the anonymous book is first cataloged without the author's name and the name is afterwards found, this name should be filled in, in its regular place on all cards, following the regular rules for author and secondary fulness. (5) Title cards. As the main card for an anonymous book with the author not found is filed under its title, no other title card is necessary but if the author is later found and filled in, a new card in the regular form for a title card should be made. When this new card is made, its tracing on the back of the main card should not be forgotten. c Anonymous books — By the author of. When an anonymous work of undiscovered authorship bears on its title-page such a phrase as "by the author of", enter it under its title with an added entry under the title quoted, followed by the words "Author of". If different titles are thus used by an author at various times, make the added entry under the title most frequently referred to, or, in case of doubt, under one of his best known or earlier works. Refer from the title of each work to the title thus chosen. A.L. A. rules, 114. 118 ANONYMOUS BOOKS g2c-d The added entries under the title referred to should be on the plan of a series card, as suggested for pseudonyms under section S6e; e. g. supposing that the author of Elizabeth and her German garden was unknown, the added entries would take the following form : E45p E43e E43a E43pr lizjabeth and her German garden, thor of. Pious pilgrimage. 1S01. Au- Elizabeth and her German garden. 1900. Adventures of Elizabeth in Rugon. 1904. Priaoese Priscilla's fortnight. 1905. the main entry for each book being made under its own title, with the note: For other works by the same author see Elizabeth and her German garden, Author of While the added entry is to be made in each case for books falling under this rule the note should not be given until other books are listed under the same added entry heading. If in the sample above, which resembles a series card, the author heading had occupied only one line, a blank line would have been left before the first title, as on regular series cards. d Reference from well-known titles. Occasionally in the case of authors who have been identified but who have published many of their books under a phrase identifying them with a special title a reference from this title may be convenient, if the book itself is not in the library; as, Schonberg-Cotta family, see Charles, Mrs Elizabeth (Rundle) Author of, 1828-1896 119 93 CATALOGING RULES INITIALS Books are occasionally published, not under the author's name hut under initials, asterisks or some other slight representation of his name. These books, like anonymous and pseudonymous books, fall into two classes: (1) those of which the author is known; (2) those of which he is still unknown. 93 Author's name known, a Main entry. When, for a book published under initials or other slight representation of the author's name, the author's name is known, the main entry is, as usual, made under his name, the supplied parts of the name being bracketed in exact work. b Added entries. The usual added entries should be made, but title cards should be made with the same liberality (in accordance with the same rules, but subject to the same exceptions) as for pseudonymous works (section 88). c Treatment of the initials. Aside from the usual added entries the publication of the initials on the title-page introduces a special feature. Since the initials are employed to represent the author's name they are similar in nature to a pseudonym and call for some form of recognition in the catalog. This recognition may be covered by any one of three methods of treatment, two cards be- ing called for in each case, one under the initials with the one given last on the title-page given first on the cards (corresponding to the usual inversion of the author's name in author headings, and there- fore designated in the following pages as "initials inverted") and the other under the initials in title-page order. (1) Method 1: general secondary entries. Two general secondary entries may be made, one under the initials inverted and one under the initials in title-page order (see samples 4-5 below), the initials being retained in the title (or mentioned in a note) to justify the entry. (2) Method 2: references from initials with- out book title. Two references to the author's name ( in the full form for an author heading) may be made, one from the initials inverted and one from the initials in title-page order (see samples 6-9 below). (3) Method 3 : references from initials with book title. Two references to the author's name (in the full form for an author heading) may be made, one from the initials inverted and one from the initials in title-page order, the initials 120 INITIALS 53 being followed in each case by the title of the book i beginning, on the line below the initials, at the second indention, with first indention for subsequent lines) and, at intervals of one centimeter, the imprint date (or its substitute) and the number of volumes if more than one (see samples 10-13 below). Since these references are for a special book they should also carry the call number, which makes them in effect added entries, involving the necessity for their being traced on the main card. Although the reference character of these cards would serve to justify second indention for the initials and third indention for the title, it is better to use regular author and title indention, in order to conform to the indention desirable when the reference is from the author's full name with title (see Changed titles, section 97&(l) (o) below), where the reference cards should be alphabeted in with the full entries for the author. Relative advantages. The first of these methods seems for the majority of cases the most satisfactory, since it gives to the reader at once the main facts, including the call number, thereby preventing the annoyance so often felt at being told to look elsewhere, while at the same time it oc- casions the cataloger very little more work, when only a single book is involved. Even if several books by the same author are published under his initials the convenience of the reader would still seem more than an offset to the slight extra work on the part of the cataloger, and this method has a special advantage over Method 2, in cases where the same initials have been used by different authors. Another very important advantage is that of uniformity with the most satisfactory treatment of books pub- lished under initials and cataloged while the author is still unknown, where the anonymous method (section 94a below) is followed. When, however, many books are known to have been published under a combination of initials representing a certain author, e. g. A. L. O. E. ' (even though they are not largely represented in the library) it is recom- mended that Method 2 (i. e. reference from initials to author's name) be used, as in the case of pseudonyms, ff at any time, having started with Method 1, it seems best to abandon it for Method 2, this may be done by removing from the catalog the general secondary entries and substituting the reference cards, being careful to remove also or cancel the tracing for the general secondary entries, on the main cards. Method 3 is a combination of Methods 1 and 2, resulting in the form of a reference card, but with the same information as a general secondary card, and the statements given above as to the relation of Method I to Method 2 would apply equally to Method 3, including the statement regard- ing the substitution of Method 2, if at any time desired. 1 In this case the letters used represent not the initials of the author's actual name, "Charlotte Maria Tucker", but a descriptive phrase, "A lady of England". The same principle, however, would apply when the letters used were really the initials of the author's name. 121 93 CATALOGING RULES Sample cards i Main card for book published under initials, name found 3Q>5 JMtevillj, Lord William, Bceauchamp, N52 1860- Penal servitude; by W.B.N... Putnam, 1903. 308p. 19£cra. N.Y. 2 Corresponding subject card 3G5 N5^ PRISONS. fyevUlj, Lord W:B. 1860- Penal servitude ; by W.B.N... Putnam, 1903. 308p. 19£ora. N.Y, 3 Corresponding title card 30,5 N52 Penal servitude, Ncevllllj , Lord W:B. 1903, 4-5 General secondary entries 4 Under initials inverted 3G5 N57. Icev N., W.B. 11 3 , Lord W:3. Penal servitude; by W.B.N. 1903. 5 Under initials in title-page order 3Q>5 N5Z W.B.N. ^cQv{ll 3 , Lord W:B. Penal servitude; by W.B.N, 1903. 122 INITIALS 93 (or) 6-9 References from initials without book title 6-7 From initials inverted 6 N., W.3. see fevllll, Lord William Beauchamp, 1860- (or) 7 N., W.B. Books by this author will be found in thia oatalog under the heading: Nevill, Lord] William Beauchamp, 1860- (also) S-9 From initials in title-page order W.B.N. see Nevib.1, Lord William Beauchamp, 1860- (or) 9 W.B.N. Books by this author will be found in thiaj catalog under the heading: Nevill, Lord] William Beauchamp, 1860- 123 93 CATALOGING RULES (or) 10-13 References from initials with book title; call number given iq-ii From initials inverted 10 (When, as in the forms used in samples 10 and 12, the book title is in- cluded in the part referred from, the word "see" is written on the line below the title (with its date and number of volumes when more than one) according to Library of Congress usage.) 3G5 N52. n. t iw.b. Penal servitude. 1903, see fevilll, Lord William Beauchamp, 1860- (or) 11 3G5 N5Z M5Z 5G5 N52- ».* W.B. Penal servitude. 1903, Full entry to be found in this cata- log under the heading: Nevill, Lord Wil- li axq Beauchamp, 1860- (also) 12-13 From initials in title-page order 12 P.B.I enal servitude. 1903, Mevijll, Lord William Beaucnamp, (or) 13 1860- W.B. N. Penal servitude. 1903, Full entry to be found in this cata- log under the heading: Nevill, Lord Wil- liam Beauchamp, 1860- 124 INITIALS 94-943 94 Author's name unknown. For books published under initials or other slight representations of an unidentified author's name two methods of treatment are presented: (a) on the plan of anonymous books, A. L. A. rules; and (b) by the use of the initials etc. as author heading, Cutter. a Anonymous treatment. Enter under title books in which initials, asterisks, or other typographical devices, not identified, are used in place of the author's name. Make added entry or reference under the initials (both first and last letters), asterisks, etc. A. L. A. rules, iifj. For illustrative examples of such books see A. L. A. rules, 115. As shown in the following samples, on all cards a line is left blank for the author's name to be filled in later if found, as pre- viously in the case of an anonymous book. In the title the initials are included, as on the title-page, since they are what the author has chosen to represent him and since, not being given author treatment under this method, they would not, in most cases, other- wise appear on the cards. When, as frequently happens, the ini- tials do not appear on the title-page but are signed to the preface, to the dedication or to letters (of which the book may consist) they should be accounted for on all cards by a note, e. g. Preface (or Dedication, or Letters, as the case may be) signed "L. M. T." ( 1 ) General secondary entries under initials. The chief feature distinguishing the treatment of these books from that of really anonymous books consists in the general secondary entries made under initials (both inverted and in title-page order). In the initials we have on the title-page what represents the anther's name and yet is not on the cards given author treatment. These initials may therefore be regarded as coming under the definition for general secondaries (section 45), i. c. "entries made for indi- viduals . . . etc. having some kind of author connection with the book . . . yet not really that of author ..." and by making the entries in the form of general secondaries they conform in appear- ance to the other added entries for the same book. (2) Author'- name found later. A.S in the case of really anonymous books (section 926 (4) above), if the author's name i« found after the book is cataloged, it should be filled in, in its regular place on the cards already made, following the regular rules for author and secondary fulness; and, again as in the case of a.ionymous hooks ( section ( L7> ( 5 ) above), a new title card should be made in the regular form for a title card, such card having been unnecessary while the main card was filed under the title. 125 94a CATALOGING RULES If, after the author is identified, references are preferred to general secondary entries for the initials, the substitution may be made at this time, as suggested for the substitution of Method 2 for Method I, in the note under 93c, care being taken to remove the tracing for the general secondaries, from the main card. 14-18 Author unidentified; main entry under title 14 Main entry 340.481 -65 er, Boat Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear* by R.A.L.; ed.by Anna Chapin Ray. . Little. 1918. 288p. 19£cm. 15 Corresponding subject card 340481 LG5 er, P S u EUROPEAN WAR, 1914- NARRATIVES. - PERSONAL Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- by R.A.L. ; ed.by Anna Chapin Ray. . Little. 1918. 388p. 19 Jem. 16 Editor card $40,481 LG5 Ray, Anna Chapin, 1865- ed, Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- er, (by R.A.L. 1918. 17 General secondary under initials inverted 340.48! L.G5 er, L., R.A. Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- by R.A.L. 1918. 126 INITIALS 94a-b 18 General secondary under initials in title-page order LG5 er, 3. A. L. Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- by R.A.L. 1918. b Initials etc. used as author heading. In Cutter 96, is found the direction to enter under "part of the author's name when only a part is known . . . initials are to be used whether they are in the title or only signed to a preface or to the text or are other- wise known." When this thoroughly logical system is adopted the main entry for the book is made under the initials inverted (i. e. with the initial given last on the title-page given first on the card), correspond- ing to the customary inversion of the author's name. On added entry cards the author item holds the same relation to the head- ing used for the main entry as in the case of books where the author's name is known, a space being left after any initial on any card (whether main or added entry) where the name would be writ- ten out if known, on the principle observed in leaving space on cards, where for an author's forenames only the initials are known (see sample cards 19-28 below). While space should be left in the heading on the main card for the filling in after initials if the name is found later, on the curds which are to be permanently filed under initials alone (as indicated in (1) and (2) below) no such space should be left between initials referred from, since there the names arc not to be filled in (see samples 23-27 below, and 4-13 above). (1) Treatment of initials in titl e-p age order. Since, when following this method, the main entry is made under the initials inverted, no extra card is needed for that arrangement of the initials as long as the author's name is unknown, but the initials in title-page order should be recognized, and for this pur- pose the general secondary treatment is recommended, as for cases where the author's name is known (section 93), though either of the methods of reference there suggested (i. e. reference from the initials alone or from the initials with book title) may be used if preferred (see samples 23-27 below). (2) A uthor's name f o u n d late r. 1 f . after the book has been cataloged under initials, the author's name is found, it should be filled in on the cards already made, according to the 127 94b CATALOGING RULES regular rules for author and secondary fulness. An extra card should then be made for the initials inverted, which would be filed at the beginning of the entries under the entry initial, and there- fore be separated from the main author entry. This extra card should be in the form of a general secondary or of a reference card, according to the treatment previously chosen for the initials in title- page order, which should in turn be influenced by the policy adopted for books published under initials, but whose author has been identified at the time of cataloging (section 93). (3) Title cards. Title cards should be made for books entered under initials, asterisks etc. according to the directions for pseudonymous books, section 88. 19-27 Author unidentified; main entry under initials inverted (Same book used for illustration as in samples 14-18. In the previous samples the book number "L65" was assigned from the Cutter tables for the entry word "Letters"; in the following samples the letter "L" stand- ing alone represents the initial of the author's name, the remainder of which is unknown.) 19 Main entry L ^ A Letters of a Canadian 3tretcaer bear- er, by R.A.L.J ed.by Anna Chapin Ray. 3ost. Little, 1918. 283p. 19£cm. 20 Corresponding subject card 340481 L L., er, Boat EUROPEAN TCAR, 1914- — PERSONAL NARRATIVES. R.A. Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- by R.A.L.; ed.by Anna Chapin Ray. Little. 1918. 283p. 19^om 21 Editor card 340481 L er. Ray, Anna Chapin, 1865- ed, R.A. Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- 1918. 28 INITIALS 22 Title card 94b 54-0.48l[ Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- er. 1918. L. , R.A. 23 General secondary; initials in title-page order 34-0.481 L L. , er, R.A.L. R.A. Letters of a Canadian stretcher bear- by R.A.L. 1918. (or) 24-25 Reference from initials in title-page order, without booh title 24 I*;, R.A.L. see R. A. (or) 25 this R. R.A.L. Books by this author will bo found in catalog under the heading: L. , A. 129 94b CATALOGING RULES {or) 26-27 Reference from initials in title-page order, with book title; call number given 26 (For position of word "see", consult statement accompanying sample 10, above) S40.481 P.. A. I*. L Letters of a Canadian stretcher bsar- er. 1918, see L., R. A. (or) 27 ^40.48\R.A.L. L_ Letters of a Canadian stretoher bear- er. 1919. Full entry to be found in this cata- log under the heading: L. , R. A. 28 Author unidentified; initials combined with asterisks; entered under initials inverted: main entry P Ja u, ri» Sketches of the character and writ- ings of eminent living surgeons and phy- sicians of Paris; tr.from the French by Elislha Sartlett. Bost. Carter, 1831. 131p. 2 port. 19om. 130 PARTIAL TITLES, BINDER'S TITLES, ETC. 95 a "t> PARTIAL TITLES BINDER'S TITLES, COVER TITLES, HALF-TITLES AND RUNNING TITLES CHANGED TITLES, INCLUDING TRANSLATIONS UNDER DIFFERENT TITLES Title cards under any of these specifications should be made either in place of or in addition to usual title cards, when sufficiently different from the title-page title, if the extra titles are such as are likely to be remembered and looked for, except when, as in the case of ordinary titles, a subject entry answers the need. 95 Partial title, a Definition. A catch title consisting of only a part of the title as given on the title-page, but applied only when the shortening consists in the omission of words which would be retained on a regular title card if made. Occasionally the partial title is a shortened form beginning like the full title (e. g. partial title Saints' rest, full title Saints' everlasting rest) but more often it is a phrase which omits the first words of the full title; it may or may not be a subtitle or alternative title. b Form of entry. The entry consists of the call number in irs usual place; the partial title on the top line (written without . . . and without the date or number of volumes) beginning at the second indention but indented one-half centimeter further if it runs over the line ; the author's name on the next line, in secondary fulness, as on ordinary title cards, beginning at the outer indention but for subsequent lines indented one-half centimeter to the right of the second vertical line ; the title as given on the title-page on the next line, second indention, taking outer indention for subsequent lines, and followed at intervals of one centimeter by the imprint date (or its substitute) and the number of volumes if more than one. For the fuller title given after the author's name the . . . are to be used as on ordinary title or editor cards. A short title may be used but it should be long enough to include the partial title. Sample cards D314- Robinson Crusoe. Defoe, Daniel. Llf3 and surprising adventures of obinson Crusoe. 1903. 131 95b-g6b CATALOGING RULES A5CT< Andr ters 1905h (The) seven little sisters prove their sisterhood, ews, Jane. Each and all: the seven little sis- prove their sisterhood. c c 1877- K\4-t Ten weeks with a circus. cKal^r a , J.O. Toby Tyler; or, Ten weeks with a oir- c c 1881 3 For class work it is recommended that the full form of partial title card be used, but in libraries which do not aim at bibliographic exactness it will often be sufficient to make a card with the appearance of a regular title card, giving the call number, catch title with the date, number of volumes when more than one, and author's name, omitting the fuller title, but this method should not be used for the other title modifications treated below. c Tracing. As the partial titles are added entries, they should he traced on the main cards, the abbreviation "pt t" being used. The word under which the entry is made should be added in curves when the catch phrase is not perfectly obvious. 96 Binder's titles, Cover titles, Half-titles and Running titles. a Definitions. The following definitions are taken from the A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 13-16. Binder' s title: The title lettered on the back of a book by the binder, as distinguished from the title on the publisher's original binding or cover, (cf. Cover title) Cover title: The title printed on the original covers of a book or lettered on the publisher's binding, as distinguished from the title lettered on the back of a particular copy of the book by the binder, (cf Binder's title) Half-title: A brief title, usually without author's name or imprint, printed on a leaf preceding the main title-page ; called also bastard title. Running title: The title repeated at the top of each page of the book or of a section. b Form of entry. When any of these forms is merely a shorten- ing of the title given on the title-page, the partial title form is generally to be preferred, as it is slightly simpler and would remain true (which would not always be the case with binder's or cover titles) when hooks were rebound. When special titles can not 132 PARTIAL TITLES, BINDER S TITLES, ETC. 96D-97D properly be regarded as partial titles they should be noted on the main card and subject cards and should, in the heading on the special title cards, be followed by a comma and, at a distance of one centimeter, by the phrase "binder's title of", "cover title of", "half-title of", or "running title of", the remainder of the card be- ing like that for the partial title; e. g. i Main card S73.2.4 Freeman, Frederick, FS5 1799- j.83: (Civilization and barbarism.. :illuatra- jted jby especial refez.-en.oe to Metaoomot and the extinction of his race. Cambo c Mas|s. 3 Printed for the author, 1373. 186p. 22om. after Cover title: The aborigines, 1620 a,nd 2 Cover title 373.24 -85 (The) aborigines, 1620 and after, cover title of Freeman, Frederick. Civilization and barbarism, illustra- ted by especial reference to Metacomet and the extinction of his race. 1878o As in the case of partial title cards, the . . . and date and number of volumes when more than one are not used with the special title but are used with the real title as taken from the title- page, according to the rules for added short-entry cards. 97 Changed titles, a Varieties. Changed titles may include: (1) Books reprinted with no change except in the title (2) Revised editions under different titles, including books re- written by the author (3) Abridgments under different titles (4) Different translations of the same work under different titles b Treatment. Same work published under different titles: If a book has been published under two or more titles, make full entry 133 97b CATALOGING RULES for each of the editions in the library and give in a note under each entry the other title or titles under which the book has appeared. If the library has but one of the editions, make full entry under this title and refer from the others. A. L. A. rules, 143. Sample of treatment, three titles in the library H44w Hildreth, Richard 3 1807-1865. (The) white slave; or, Memoirs of a fugitive... Bost. Tappan, 1852. 408p. plates, 19om. Originally published under title: The elave; or, Memoirs of Archy Moore (call no. H644s) ; republished under title: Archy Moore (call no. H644a) HQ>44a Hildreth, Richard, 1807-1865. Archy Moore, the white slave; or, irs of a fugitive... N.Y. Miller, ^emo 1855 408p. plates, 19 cm. Originally published under title: The slave (call no. H644s) ; also published under title: The white slave (call no. H644w) In such cases the regular title cards should be made as usual ex- cept for the addition of the note. In this special case, also, a pseu- donym reference should be made for the earliest form, i. e. from Moore, Archy, pseud, to Hildreth, Richard. 134 CHANGED TITLES 97b When the call number for a book is given in a note on the cards for another book, these cards (in addition to their relation to their own book) become in effect added entries for the former, since the note should be changed if the book noted was lost or its call number altered. Consequently the note should be traced (for every card on which it appears) on the main card for the book thus noted ; e. g. on the back of the main card for Hildreth's The slave : Noted on auth and t cards for Hildreth's The white slave and his Archy Moore. Treatment of same book; two titles only in library Earlier title HG44-S -Hildjreth, Richardj 1807-1865. (The) slave; or, Memoirs of Archy tfoore c pseud.;, . . . 3d ed. . . Bost. Massa- chusetts anti-slavery soo. 1840, 2v, in 1, 18cm. (call Republished under titles: Arohy Moore no. H644a) and The white slave. HG44s (The) slave; or, Memoirs of Arohy Moore. 1840. 2v. in 1. jiildreth, Richard 3 Republished under titles: Arohy Moore (oall no. H644a) and The white slave. Moore, Arohy, .d|reth, Richard, (or) pseud. see 1807-1865 Moore, Archy, pseud. Books by this author will be found in this catalog under- the heading: Hildreth, Richard, 1807-1865. 135 97b CATALOGING RULES Later title H Q>44 a Hildr i lave s undelr eth, Richard, 1807-1365. Arohy Moore, the white slave; or, Memciirs of a fugitive... N.Y. Miller, 1855. 408p. plates, 19cm. Originally published under title: The (call no. H644s) ; also published title: The white slave. RC44a Archy Moore, the white slave; or, Memoirs of a fugitive. 1855. Hildireth, Richard. dave s undelr Originally published under title: The (call no. HS44s) ; also published title: The white slave. References from the third titte, not in library (The directions for making the references follow these two cards.) H644s HG44a Hildireth, Richard, 1807-1865. (The) white slave; or, Memoirs of a fugitive, see his (The) slave; or, Memoirs of Arohy lioorje. 1840. 2v. in 1; or his Archy Moore, the white slave. 1855. Sams work published under different titles. 136 CHANGED TITLES 97 b-b(i)(b) HG44a (The) white slave; or, Memoirs of a fugitive, ildlreth, Richard, see his (The) slave; or, Memoirs of Archy >rje. 1840. 3v. in 1; or his Archy Moore, the white slave. 1855. Same work published under different titles. (Notice that in the samples above, a comma is used after the phrase preceding "see his", and a semicolon after the phrase preceding "or his", but a period at the end of the complete reference, in this case after the "1855".) (1) References from title not in library. (See samples above.) (0) Author reference. Write the author's name and the book title from Avhich reference is to be made, in the position and fulness regularly used for an author entry. (As there is no special copy of the work in the library, to be described, there is nothing to be given in the way of imprint or collation.) On the line below the title, beginning at the third indention, write the words "see his" and on the following line (using regular title indention, i. e. beginning at the second indention and coming back to first- indention for subsequent lines) write the title referred to, followed at intervals of one centimeter by the imprint date (or its substitute) and the number of volumes if more than one. Opposite the title referred to, at the left edge of the card, give the correspond- ing call number. If the call number consists of both class number and book number, write them on the same line, with one space be- tween. If reference is to be made to a second title (i. e. if the library has the same work under two titles other than the one referred from) write the words ''or his" on the line below the first title (with its short imprint and collation), at the third indention, and on the fol- lowing line the second title referred to, following the same rules as for the first title referred to, given above. (b) Title reference. For the reference made primarily from title, write the title from which reference is to be made on the top line, beginning at the second indention and using third indention for 137 97b(i)(b)-(3) CATALOGING RULES subsequent lines, as on ordinary title cards. (As in the case of author reference, there is no imprint or collation.) On the line be- low the title write the author's name, in the position and fulness reg- ularly used on title cards. On the following line, at the third in- dention, write the words "see his", and on the line below (using regular title indention, i. e. beginning at the second indention and coming back to first indention for subsequent lines) give the title referred to followed at intervals of one centimeter by the imprint date (or its substitute) and the number of volumes if more than one. Opposite the title referred to, at the left edge of the card, give the corresponding call number, as for the author reference. If there is a second title to be referred to, write the words '"or his"' on the line below the first title (with its short imprint and col- lation), at the third indention, and on the following line the second title referred to, applying the same rules as for the first title re- ferred to, given above. In this treatment of references, the part referred from, i. e. (for the author reference) the author and title, or (for the title reference) the title and author, takes exactly the same form for the two items included (i. e. the author and title) as on regular author and title cards. Beginning with the reference part of the card (i. e. the words "see his") the forms on the author reference and the title reference are exactly alike. (2) When references are not made for miss- ing titles, (a) Title. Reference should regularly be made from the author with the missing title, but reference should not be made primarily from the missing title unless a title card would be made for the book if in the library. (b) Subject. If the book cataloged is one which calls for a sub- ject card this should include the note regarding other titles but no extra subject card for a title not in the library should be made. (c) Editor, translator, etc. If a card is made for an editor or translator it should not include the note, nor should an extra card for a title not in the library be made under editor or translator unless (applying to both these points) the work under the missing title is that of the same editor or translator. (3) Notes. Generally the information regarding the different titles is best given in a note, but if it is given in the title on the title-page, it may be retained there and the note omitted. Notes should give as exact information as the cataloger's knowl- edge warrants ; e. g. Published in England under title : ; Re- written and published under title: ; etc. 138 CHANGED TITLES 97b(4)-g8 (4) Call numbers. When the different titles are in the library the call number for each is given on its own cards in the usual place and the call numbers for the others are included in the note. When not all the titles are in the library the call number for each which is in the library is given on its own cards in the usual place but on the reference cards for the titles which are not in the library is written in the margin opposite the title to which it belongs. (5) Tracing. When the different titles are in the library each book is cataloged by itself and the tracing follows the usual rules, except for the addition of the tracing of the notes, specified above under "Sample of treatment; three titles in the library". When not all the titles are in the library the cards for those missing (although in form they are reference cards) are prac- tically added entries for those in the library, and since they refer to all the forms of title which are in the library they should be traced on the back of the main card for each such form; e. g. Extra card for Hildreth " t If more than one of the titles were not in the library the tracing should read, e. g. 2 extra cards for Hildreth 2 " t 98 Translations under different titles. These are in general treated like other changed titles but when convenient the title of the original should be included in the note ; e. g. B\3Sr eolu titl (c all Salzjac, Honore de, 1799-1850. # ,..(The) alkahest; or, The house of Claeis; c tr. by Katharine Presoott T7ormeley J( Bostl. Roberts, 1837. 307p. 19cm. (Comedy of human life; philosophical studies) Translation of La recherche de l'ab- , which is al3o translated under the es: Balthazar; or, Science and love no. B198r2) and The alohemist. 139 98 CATALOGING RULES Brs>8< ...(The) alkahest; or, The house of Claes. 1887. Balzko, Honore de. Translation by K. .P.Wormeley, of La treoherche de 1' absolu, which is also translated under the titles: Balthazar; or, Soienoe and love (call no. B198r2) and The alchemist. BlSfcr 31ae 30lU c Wormelsy, Katharine Presoott 3 1830-1908, tr. 3alz|ac, Honore de. ...(The) alkah?st; or, The house of s. 1887. Translation of La recherche de 1' ab- B\2>fcrZ Balzlac, Iijpnore 3 de, 1799-1850. Balthazar; or, Science and love; tr. by 7,'illiam Robson. Lond. Routledge, 1859. 170p. 16cm. Translation of La recherche de 1' ab- solu, which is also translated under the titles: The alkahest; or, The house of Slaels (call no. B198r) and The alchemist, BI^StZ Balthazar; or, Science and love. 1859. LZiac, H,onorej de. Translation by William Robson, of La recherche de l'absolu, which is also translated under the titles: The alka- he3th or, The house of Claes (call no. 319ar) and The alchemist. 140 TRANSLATIONS UNDER DIFFERENT TITLES y 8-g8a B\3SrZ Bali b.859 Rcbson, William, 1785-1863, o, Htpnorej ds. althazar; or, Science and love. tr, Translation of La recherche de l'ab- 30 lu On the author and title cards above, which are concerned primarily with Balzac's work, other translations are mentioned in the note, but not on the translator cards, since these are designed to give the work of the transla- tors mentioned in the headings and are not concerned with other transla- tions. BV32>r Clae' 1859 3alz!ac, Honore de, 1799-1850. (The) alchemist, see his ...(The) alkahest; or, The house of 3. 1887; or hi3 Balthazar; or, Science and love. Translations of the same work: La rechjerche de 1' absolu. (The) alchemist. Balzac, Honore de, see his D\ ( b , or . ...(The) alkahest; or, The house of Clae s. 1387; or his D\^?>rZ (Balthazar; or, Science and love. 1859. Translations of the same work: La recherche ae l 1 . absolu. a Alternative method. A library having many works of an author, with translations under different titles, might often find it convenient to have the cards for all forms of a work in a single 141 g8a-a(i) CATALOGING RULES group. This may be done by adding in the upper right corner of the author card (either in black or red) the title of the book in the original, and alphabeting, under the author's name, by the original title. When this is done, a reference card should be made under the author's name, to be alphabeted by the title of the special trans- lation ; e. g. Main card (To be arranged under Balzac, according to the original French title) (La) recherche <4e 1'absolu ac, Honcre de, 1799-1850. ...(The) alkahest; or, The house of Claejs; r tr. by Katharine Prescott Wormeleyj. Bostf. Roberts, 1367. 307p, 19om. (Comedy of human life; philosophical studies) soli; ti (oal tie Translation of La recherche de 1' ab- which is also translated under* the s: Balthazar; or, Science and love 1 no. 3198r2) and The alchemist. Reference card (To be arranged under Balzac, according to its own title) Bvss- 3alzjac, Honors de, 1799-1S50. ...(The) alkahest; or, The house of ;e|3; c tr.by Katharine Prescott Vormeley 3 For full entry for this book see card undejr Balzac, arranged by the title of the original work: (La) recherohe de l'ab- soli*. This reference card bears the call number and should be traced on the main card ; e. g. Extra card under Balzac — The alkahest. (1) Title card. The title card would take the regular form as shown in the first method, given above, including the note regarding the title of the original and the titles of translations. 142 TRANSLATIONS UNDER DIFFERENT TITLES 98a(2) (2) References for titles not in library. If this second method is followed the references for forms of title not in the library may be made on the following plan : Under author Balzac, Honore de, (The) alchemist. La r in zao work or, and no. 1799-1850. the Title of one of the translations of eoherche de l'absolu. Translations of this work which are library are arranged under Bal- g name, by the title of the original (La) recherche de l'absolu. The librjary has the following: The alkahest; The house of Claes (call no. B198r) Balthazar; or, Science and love (call B198r2) Under title Bais^jac, Honore de, .tie of one of the translations of La ilecherche de 1' absolu, (Translations of this work which are tie library are arranged under Bal- zac '.a name, by the title of the original workj: (La) recherche de l'absolu. The library has the following: The alkahest; or, The hou3© of Claes (call no. B198r) and Balthazar; or, Science and love (call no. B198r3) By using a form of note which brings at the end the titles of translations in the library, additions of this kind may readily he made if occasion arises. Since the call numbers for the translations in the library are included in the notes, the foregoing cards are in effect added en- tries and should be traced on the back of each of the main cards for such translations ; e. g. Extra card under Balzac— The alchemist " t (The alchemist) 143 99 CATALOGING RULES ANONYMOUS CLASSICS AND SACRED BOOKS 99 General treatment. See also A. L. A. rules, 119-120, and Cutter, 123-126 and 131-132. Under the term "anonymous classics'' are included epics, na- tional folk tales and some other works whose authors are unknown and which have appeared under various forms of title, either in the original or by translation (e. g. The Arabian nights' entertainments, Tlic thousand and one nights, Stories from the Arabian nights, Book of the thousand and one nights, Tales from the Arabic, etc.) so that entry under the first word of the title (as for the ordinary anonymous book) would result in the scattering of editions. To prevent this, the name by which, in the cataloger's judgment, the book is best known, is adopted as an author heading and thus treated on all cards. The Bible and similar sacred books are cataloged on the same principle. For books belonging to these classes brackets are not used in the author headings, even though the form does not appear on the title-page. Except for the adoption of this substitute for an author heading the cataloging does not differ from previous work. The title is written as on the title-page, even if the first words are the same as the heading ; e. g. Main card S3 1 M57r> lishl by 1904 Nice lungen lied. Nibelungenlied; tr. Into rhymed Eng- verse, In the metre of the original, Gleorge Henry Needier. N.Y. Holt, 349p. 20om. Translator card (Space left for dates of birth and death. In libraries not using those dates only one centimeter should be left) lieh 1904 $5\ ^esdler, George Henry, N57n tr. Nibelungenlied. Nibelungenlied; tr, Into rhymed Eng- verse, In the metre of the originals 144 ANONYMOUS CLASSICS AND SACRED HOOKS 99"99b Main card Mabinogion. bonder stories from the Mabinogion; by Edward Brooks. Phil. Perm, 1908. 338p. illus. 6pl. 19^ora. Title card MM Wonder stories from the Mabinogion. 1908. Mabinogion. Editor card 33S.2. Brooks, Edward, 1831- ed, [abinogion. Wonder stories from the Mabinogion. 1908* a Parts of anonymous classics. If a part of an anonymous clas- sic is published separately, the title of the part should he treated as a subhead of the main title, and reference made from the title of the part alone; e. g. Aladdin, published separately, should be cataloged under the heading": Arabian nights. Aladdin, with a reference from Aladdin, on the plan for cataloging of parts of the Bible, treated below. b Selected list of headings. The following list of headings u ill cover some of the most important of these works: Anglo-Saxon chronicle Arabian nights Avesta Domesday book Droplaugarsona saga Edda Saemundar Beowulf Edda Snorra Sturlusonar Bible Egils saga Skallagrimssonar 1 Chanson de Roland Eyrbyggja saga Cid Federalist Cuchulain Frithiofs saga hins Froekna 'The full French form is here given, hut some libraries may prefer the catch title, Roland, as being equally applicable to French and English ver- sions. 145 gcjb-c CATALOGING RULES Gesta Romanorum Giolla an fhiugha Grettis saga Guclrun Gunnlaugs saga Ormstungn ok Skald-Hrafns Heliand Hitopadesa Kalevala Koran Kormaks saga Lancelot Laxdaela saga Mabinogion Mahabharata Merlin Le morte Arthur Mother Goose Nibelungenlied Njala Oberammergau passion-play Clafs saga Helga Olafs saga Tryggvasonar Reynard the fox Sturlunga saga Talmud Thorsteins saga Vikingssonar Vedas Volsunga saga c Bible. The treatment for the Bible is the same in principle as for anonymous classics, but as libraries are likely to have many editions and many parts published separately, a more detailed head- ing is generally desirable; i. e. The Bible or any part of the Bible, including the Apocrypha, should be entered under the word Bible, with such subdivisions as are necessary ; e. g. Bible. English. 1830. English. 1870. O. T. Pentateuch. New Testament. English. 1896. New Testament. English. 1904. New Testament. German. N. T. Matthew. N. T. John. English. N. T. John. French. Bible. Bible. Bible. Bible. Bible. Bible. Bible. Bible. The subdivisions should be carried out to the specific part of the Bible, the language and the imprint date being added in the heading when needed to distinguish. Some libraries use the language designation in the heading, only for foreign languages. In the case of individual Gospels the word Gospels may be inserted in the heading before the name of the book, but this lengthens the heading with- out special corresponding advantage. 146 BIBLE 99c(i)-(5) (1) Bibles in two languages. For Bibles in two languages both languages are given in the heading, the least familiar being mentioned first; e. g. Bible. French and English. If neither of the languages is English an added entry should be made with the languages reversed ; e. g. the main entry under Bible. Latin and Italian, with an added entry under Bible. Italian and Latin, in the author position, followed. on the next line by a short title, the imprint date (or its substitute) and number of volumes if more than one (see samples 9-10 below). (2) Old Testament an.d New Testament in heading. In the illustrations shown above, Old Testament and New Testament are written out when those parts of the Bible are cataloged as a whole, but when a smaller division, e. g. a single book, is the distinctive item, and the Testament divisions serve chiefly as a convenience in filing the cards, they are abbreviated to O. T. and X. T. both for the purpose of shortening the heading and to make more prominent the distinctive part. On the Library of Congress printed cards the abbreviation O. T. or N. T. is regularly used, even for the entire text of the Old Testament or New Testament. (3) References. References are made in "author - from titles of volumes (when the titles are of a general character ) and from names of parts of the Bible to the headings used; e. g. Holy Bible, see Bible (Die) Bibel, see Bible. German Isaiah, Book of, see Bible. O. T. Isaiah or the longer form of reference may be used, as shown in sample cards 3 and 6 below. (4) Form entries. A subject entry is not made for text of the Bible, but when the text is in a very unusual language a form entry (having in all respects the appearance of a subject entry) may be made under the name of the language, as shown below in sample card 7 (Coptic language — Texts). (5) Editor and translator cards. On editor and translator cards the full author heading given on the main card might be used, but the value of the detailed heading is in grouping and distinguishing works under the general heading "Bible" and for the few Bible headings likely to be found under an individual editor 147 99c(5)-(8) CATALOGING RULES or translator no such purpose would generally be served. Therefore on editor and translator cards for Biblical text, such subdivisions (i. e. language and date) as are given beyond the part of the Bible treated may, in most cases, very satisfactorily be omitted. (6) Title entries. Title entries should be made only in very rare cases, i. e. for individual titles likely to be used only for certain editions ; e. g. Bay Psalm book. (7) Series cards. On such series cards as that for the Modern reader's Bible the titles of the volumes may be omitted when clearly indicated by the author headings. The latter need not be carried out beyond the part of the Bible cataloged, even if more details are given in the heading on the main card. (8) Capitalization. No positive ruling on this point seems to be available, but the following suggestions 1 are in line with the practice in general on the Library of Congress cards. Bible, Biblical, etc. the Holy Bible in Bible words of Biblical terms la Sainte Bible die Bibel la Sacra Eibbia Biblia sacra a Biblia Sagrada (Portuguese) la Sagrada Biblia (Spanish) la Santa Biblia Scriptures, etc. the Scriptures the Holy Scriptures the Sacred Scriptures Holy Scripture of the Old and New Testaments the canonical Scriptures inspiration of Scripture the Scripture prophecies the Scriptural references Testament the Testament the Old Testament the New Testament the Old and New Testaments le Vieux et le Nouveau Testament das Alte und Neue Testament 1' Antico e il Nuovo Testamento Testamentum Vetus et Novum Vetus et Novum Testamentum o Velho e o Novo Testamento el Antiguo y el" Nuevo Testamcto Other group headings the Vulgate la Vulgata latina the Septuagint the Octateuch the Hexateuch the Pentateuch the Gospels the Apocrypha the apocryphal books the apocryphal New Testament Separate books the book of Exodus first book of the Kings the books of Chronicles the Psalms the book of Psalms the Psalter the Bay Psalm book the Song of Solomon tin' Song of songs 1 Compiled mainly by Miss Caroline Wandell. 148 BIBLE 9gc(8)-(io)(a) the book of Canticles Acta apostolorum the book of the prophet Isaiah the Epistle to the Romans the Gospel of St Mark the Apocalypse the Acts of the Apostles the Revelation (9) Arrangement. For arrangement of entries under Bible see A. L. A. rules, up. A convenient method of indicating the arrangement is a guide card with some such statement as: Bible. The arrangement of entries for text of the Bible or any of its parts or for works regarding the Bible or its parts follows in general the arrangement of the Bible itself as given below. Headings under which entries have been made are indicated by a *. This statement should be followed by a list, including the head- ings Bible, Old Testament, New Testament, the names of the separate books in Biblical order, and such additional group terms as are likely to be used, e. g. under the Old Testament: Historical books, Octateuch, Hexateuch, Pentateuch, Poetical books, Prophets, Minor prophets; and under the New Testament: Gospels, Epistles. By making this list complete at first and starring the divisions when first used a summary of the arrangement and also of the head- ings under which the library has entries may be shown at any time without rewriting the guide card. The A. L. A. list of subject headings gives all the groups of a Testament before any of the separate books of that Testament. ( 10) C o m m entaries. J When the text of a work is given with a commentary, the work is to be cataloged under the name of the author of the text and a reference or an added entry made under the name of the author of the commentary. It may occasionally be preferable to enter commentaries published with the text under the commentator. Examples are: (i) when the typographical disposition of the text clearly indicates its intended secondary position, e. g. in small type at the foot of the page, in parenthesis, etc., to elucidate the commentary; (2) when the text is printed in fragmentary form or is dis- tributed through the commentary in such a way that it can not be readily distinguished from it. A T , , ././.../. rules, 13. (a) With text. For commentaries with text the main card is made under either the author of the text or the author of the com- 1 Commentaries may deal with the writings of any author and the rule as given is general in its application, but the topic is here introduced in con- nection with the treatment of the Bible because so large a proportion of the commentaries in the average library deal with either the Bible or some of il^ parts. 149 99c(l0)(a)-(ll) CATALOGING RULES mentary, according to the relative importance o the text and com- mentary, as indicated in the rule above. If of equal importance, enter under the author of the text. When regarded as text of the Bible and cataloged under "Bible" as the author, the heading should be given with the same details (e. g. part of the Bible, language, and date) as specified under the general rule for the catalog- ing of the Bible. Whether the main entry is made under the author of the text (i. e. "Bible") or under the commentator, a subject entry should be made for the Bible or the special part. i The part as subhead. When a subject entry is made for a special part of the Bible, the part is treated in the heading as a subhead of "Bible", as in the case of author headings. 2 Indication of subject relation. "Subject style" in subject headings may be regarded as sufficient indication of the subject relation, or a final subhead may be used, e. g. Commentaries; or Criticism, interpretation etc Generally speaking, such a subhead would be desirable under the Bible considered as a whole, but in most libraries it would not be important in the treatment of an individual book. 3 Other subdivisions. In subject entries, subdivisions for language and date should not be given unless in some very rare instance the criticism should be for a special edition or for the Bible not merely as the Bible but distinctly as the Bible in that special language. If the main entry is made under the name of the author of the text, an added entry should be made under the commentator, designated as editor, but if the main entry is made under the name of the commentator, no added entry is needed for the text in its author relation, as that heading is covered by the subject entry. If the title of the book does not make it clear that both text and com- mentary are included, a note should be added giving the extra in- formation ; i. e. With commentary, or With text. (b) Without text. For commentaries without the text the main entry is made under the name of the author of the commen- tary, with a subject entry under Bible or the special part of the Bible commented on, parts of the Bible being treated as subheads (on the plan of the author headings) with reference (in "author style") from the name of the part. For further suggestions for subject treatment see directions above, under (a) With text. (11) Paraphrases. Paraphrases are treated like other editions of text, except that the word "Paraphrases" is added in the author heading, as a subhead, following the designation of the language (sample card 11 below). An added entry should be made for the person responsible for the work as paraphrase. This entry 150 BIBLE 99C is frequently in the form of a translator card, but occasionally in that of a general secondary, as shown in sample card 12 below. Sample cards 1-3 General treatment / Main entry 220.52. ^U5 Biblje. English. 1841, Holy Bible. . .tr. out of the original tongues and with the former translations ompared and revised. . . Ox, Univ. presjs, 1841. 1232p. 26jcm, 2-3 Reference cards 2 Bible Holy Bible, see (or) 3 Holy Bible. To be found in this catalog under the heading : Bible 4-6 Treatment including form entry and translator card 4 Main entry 225. i T'2.2 Bib 31 Job tain. e. O.T. Job. Coptic ■ Lsh. Ancient Coptic version of th3 book of the Just; tr..,and ed.by Henry Tat- Lond, St raker, 1343. 182p. 2l£om. 151 ggc CATALOGING RULES 5-6 Reference cards 5 Job, Book of, IBlblJe. O.T. Job 863 (or) 6 Job, Book of. To be found in this catalog under the heading: Bible. O.T. Job 7 Form entry 223. \ T2_2 (B Job tarn. COPTIC LANGUAGE — TEXTS. ibOJe. O.T. Job. Coptic and English. Anoient Coptio version of the book of the Just; tr...and ed.by Henry Tat- Lond. Straker, 1846. 182p. 21^cm. 8 Translator and editor card 223.1 TZ2 Bib: [Job 1739-1868, tr. Tattara, Kenry, and ed. 6. O.T. Job. Ancient Coptic version of the book of the Just. 1846. 152 BIBLE 99C 9-10 In two foreign languages g Main entry 2.20A7 „S4 espanc confior y ie sd exp San .ito umna : v.l- [V.5- Biblje. Latin and Spanish. (La) Sagrada Biblia; traducida al ol da la Vulgata latina, y anotada me al sentido de los santos padres ositores catolicos, por Felipe Scio Miguel... Barcelona, Sociedad rial La Maravilla, 1863-64. 6v. illus. plates, maps, plan, 37cm. Latin and Spanish in parallel col- Contents: 4 3 Antiguo Testamento. 6 3 Nuevo C^T e stamen to. 10 Added entry, with languages reversed; short imprint and collation Z20A1 3ible 9Sp son y He ornns ■v.5" a no for ex? Son Spanish and Latin. (La) Sagrada Biblia; traducida al 1 de la Vulgata latina, y anotada me al sentido de los santos padres ositores catolicos, por Felipe Scio Miguel. 1863-64. 6v. Latin and Spanish in parallel ool- Contents: 4 3 Antiguo Testamento. 6 3 Nuevo Testamento. 153 ggc CATALOGING RULES 11-12 Paraphrase // Main entry GST BibUJe. N.T. Gospels. English. Paraphrases, (The) good news of a spiritual realm; oarejohrased by Dwight Goddard. N.Y. Revejll c c 19163 391o. 194cm, Z7.Q> G57 12 General secondary Goddard, Dwight, 1861- Biblje. N.T. Gospels. (The) good news of a spiritual realm; paraphrased by Dwight Goddard. c Ci3i6 a 154 VOLUMINOUS AUTHORS VOLUMINOUS AUTHORS 100 Definition. This term is adopted to designate authors under whose names many titles are entered, either for different works or for different editions with different titles. A similarity in nature to the anonymous clastic exists in the variety in forms of title for the same work, which would result in the separation of different editions of the same work if, under the author's name. the alphabetic arrangement by title was strictly followed. 101 Author heading. For such authors it may be a con- venience in large catalogs to add as a subhead, in the heading for the main entry, the catch title of the book; e. g. for Shakespeare's King Lear, which might appear under its catch title or under the words "Play of" or "Tragedy of" the various editions could con- veniently be grouped under the heading, Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616. King Lear. This treatment corresponds to that for separate parts of the Bible, which are entered as subheads under the latter heading (e. g. Bible. O. T. Psalms) and follows the practice of printed book catalogs of large collections, but the catch title may, if preferred, be given in the upper right corner of the card, as suggested for translations, section 98a. On the other hand the preference of the library may be (in general) to include translations also under the present treatment, reserving the method previously suggested for use only when it is desired to add the original title to cards already made. The treatment previously given for translations is. however, recommended to be given preference for those works. Shakespeare is used £or illustration, as being the writer under whosi name the average library would have the most entries for which this method was an advantage, but the treatment is adapted to any author of whose works the library lias many titles and is specially valuable Eor authors whose individual works have been the subject of criticisms or commentaries, as it facilitates the arrangement of the subject entries immediately after the works criticized. a Spacing in headings. When the book title is used as a sub- head in the author heading it is better to leave bet ween the author's name and the dates of his birth and death, only one typewriter space instead of the usual four spaces (one centimeter), in order to make the heading, including the subhead, appear as a continuous item. 102 Title entries. When the catch titles of books are in- cluded in the author heading, the title entries may be provided for in three ways : 155 X02a-I04 CATALOGING RULES a By a reference to the author heading (as in the case of books of the Bible) e. g. King Lear, see Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616. King Lear b By a separate title card for each edition in the library. For inclusion of names of editors and translators in title see section 37*/. c By a title card for one edition (generally the first cataloged, though it may sometimes be desirable later to substitute another) with a note referring for other editions (when there are others in the library) to the author heading (see sample cards 2-3 below). 1 Editor's name in title. With this third treatment it is specially desirable to include the editor's name on the title card in order that the reader who wishes a certain edition may know at once whether the one at hand is the one desired or whether it is necessary for him to follow up the reference. 2 Full and partial title cards. In large libraries, doing careful biblio- graphic work, a card for such works as Shakespeare's separate plays may be made for the catch title, and also a first word title entry under each of the other forms appearing on title-pages of editions in the library. In the small, popular library the catch title entry would often be sufficient. For class work it is recommended that the catch title and first word title entries, when different, both be made, according to samples 2-3 below, but the note should not be given unless more than one edition of the same play is cataloged. 103 Catch title in author item on title and editor cards. On the title cards it is almost useless repetition to give the catch title in the author item, and with most editors the same would be true. If, however, the library had many works of the same writer, entered under a certain editor, it might be a convenience to have in the author item on the editor card, the catch title as on the author card (see sample 5, below) especially if, as in this sample, in the real title the catch title was considerably hidden by an introductory phrase. On these editor cards, as regularly on editor cards, the dates of the author's birth and death are omitted. 104 Editor card in series form. As an alternative to the use of the catch title in the author item on editor cards it is suggested and recommended that when the same person has edited many works by the same author an editor card on the plan of a series card be substituted for the separate editor cards for the different works. For such a card the catch title is recommended in place of the 156 VOLUMINOUS AUTHORS IOI-104 full title, dots being used to show the omission of any introductory phrase. Also, brackets should be omitted from the names of both editor and author, since no single title-page is being represented, in those items. ( See sample card 6, below.) Sample cards 1 Main card 522.33 Xlr Shaks John 3iC8 speare, c Williara 3 1564-1616. King John. History of the life and death of King ed. ..by William J. Rolfe... N.Y. Harpjer, 1380. 190p. illua. 17-jkm.- (English clas- 2 Title card S22.33 Xlr History of the life and death of King John; ed. ..by William J. Rolfe. 1880. Shakespeare, c williamj For other editions see entries under beading: Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616. King John 3 Partial title card 82233 X\T Sha John King John. eare, c William 3 History of the life and death of Kin( ed.. .by William J. Rolfe. 1880. For other editions see entries under heading: Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616. King John 157 I0I-I04 CATALOGING RULES 4 Editor card without catch title in author item 822. 33 Rolfe, William J(ame8j 1827-1910, ed. ahakiespeare, c William 3 History of the life arid death of King John]. 1880. (or) 5 Editor card with catch title in author item 322.33 Xtr Rolfe, William Jcamesj 1837-1910, ed. ShaWeapeare, c William 3 . King John. Ki3tory of the life and death of King John. 1830. 6 Editor card in series form 3h S22.33 Xtr S22..33 P3 S22.33 S"T Rolfe, William James, ed. akjespeare, William. 1837-1910, ...King John. 1880. ...Merchant of Venice, ...Hamlet. c 1903 3 ,-19031 The sample above shows the method of giving class and book number on the same line, in a list of short entries. If preferred the book number may lie written below the class number as usual. If this is done three lines should be allowed to an entry on typewritten cards (two lines on manuscript cards) in order to have the call numbers stand out distinctly, except that when the call number consists of only the book number (i. e. in fiction) two lines to an entry are sufficient on typewritten as well as on manuscript cards. 158 COLLECTIONS UNDER TITLE 105-107 COLLECTIONS UNDER TITLE 105 Main entry. When articles written separately by several authors are published together under a collective title but there is no recognized editor or editing body or compiler, or if the work of the editor or editing body seems to be but slight and the name does not appear prominently in the publication, or if there are frequent changes of editor, the main entry is made under title. For more detailed directions, with examples, see A. L. A. rules, 126. These books are not to be confused with cases of joint authorship, where the work of each individual is generally not specified and the authors have worked with a view to a combined result. a Form. In the sample cards given below, two methods of treat- ment are shown. The first corresponds to that used on the Library of Congress printed cards, where the title is given on the top line, and "hanging indention" has been adopted, i.e. the beginning of the title is drawn out to the first indention, and all subsequent lines of the entry are indented under it, beginning at the second indention (except in notes, which take the usual paragraph indention). The second method corresponds to the treatment of the ordinary anonymous book, with author unknown, i. e. the title begins on the second line and follows regular title indention, beginning at the second indention and coming back to the first indention for subse- quent lines. If it is thought advisable, this second method may be slightly modified by writing the title on the top line, while retaining the usual title indention. By this means the use of the top line is gained for these books for which no author will ever be filled in, but an exceptional treatment is introduced, the desirability of which seems questionable in view of the comparatively small number of books involved. 106 Added entries. As in previous work, the added entries are (whichever form of main entry is used) made by supplying on the top line the heading for the special entry (subject, title, editor or translator etc.), the rest of the entry following the general form of the main entry except for such difference in length of entry as is called for by the kind of card. If the main entry is given as suggested in the note under 105a the arrangement on added entry cards should be made to conform to that for periodicals (section 1246(2) below). 107 Authors' names mentioned. For such collective works the names of the several authors may be given in the title, in a note or in contents, on the main card or subject card or both, ac- cording to the judgment of the cataloger. It is not necessary to use 159 105-107 CATALOGING RILES the same form on both main and subject cards, e. g. the authors' names might be given in the title or a note on the main card and in contents on the subject card, but the main card and generally the subject card should give either a complete or a partial list of the authors unless these are very numerous. In the case of a partial list the name of the first author should be mentioned and such others as seem specially important, the remaining authors being repre- sented by the phrase "and others."' If the names of the authors are given on the title-page of the book and omitted either wholly or in part from the title on cards the omissions ( in exact work) should be indicated by ... If the phrase "and others" is supplied in the title it should be bracketed. If a partial list of authors is given in a note, the . . . need not there be used for the omissions, nor brackets placed around the phrase "and others." Sample title-page BRITON AND BOER BOTH SIDES OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN QUESTION BY RIGHT HON. JAMES BRYCE, M.P. SYDNEY BROOKS; A DIPLOMAT DR. F. V. ENGELENBURG; KARL BLIND ANDREW CARNEGIE; FRANCIS CHARMES; DEMETRIUS C. BOULGER .MAX NORDAU Reprinted by permission from The North American Review NEW YORK AND LONDON HARPER & BROTHERS PUBLISHERS 1900 160 COLLECTIONS UNDER TITLE 105-107 Sample cards (Showing different methods of treatment on main and subject cards) 1-2 Hanging indention / Main entry B>3 H*5 GENOA — DESCRIPTION. fco-jells, W:D. 1837-1920. Aehore at Genoa; Back at Genoa. (In aia Roman holidays and others. 1908, ?.35|-c3d:, 272- £ 233 3 ) (or) 13 Paging given after corresponding title 3\4.56 H$5 GENOA - DESCRIPTION. lis, W:D. 1837-1920. Ashore at Genoa, p.25-,363; Back at irsnoa, p.272-i283 3 (In his Roman holi- days and others. 1908) 727; 14-15 Title analytic by author of main work 14 Main card James, Henry, 1843-1916. ftspern papers; Louisa Pallant; The aodern warning. LoiuL Macmillan, 1838. 39 Op. 19cm. 176 ANALYTICS 15 Title analytic nok-1 T2.7 Louisa Pallant. ames, Henry. (In his Aspern papers, L95) 1833. p. c 139 3 - l Separate paging. When an analytic is separately paged the full collation is given before the curves, this detail constituting in the items given before the curves the only difference between the continuously paged and the separately paged analytic. The in- formation inside the curves is the same as for continuously paged analytics ("In" being used if the distinction is made between "in" and "see" analytics) except that the statement of paging is omit- ted. Instead is given the volume or part number if the analytic occupies a whole volume, or a "part" of a book consisting of num- bered parts. If neither of these conditions applies it is generally best, in order to show in what portion of the book the analytic occurs, to call the different groups of paging "parts" and supply numbering, e. g. t pt 2] ; but if the book already contains divisions designated as "parts" it is sometimes better to indicate the separately paged section as an "appendix", which is an exception to the ordinary treatment of an appendix, which regards it as "continuously paged" material. 16-22 Separate paging 16-20 Separate title-page 16 Author analytic in a set, main entry for which is under editor as author; undated title-page for analytic (for treatment of dated title-page see samples 23-25) 1 31 £li tre. Sheridan, Richard Brinsley Sutler, 1751-1816. (The) rivals: a comedy in five acts... sTithl remarks by Mrs Inchbald. Lond. Longman, 30p, 16x9om. (In Inchbald, Mrs th (Simpson^ ed. British thea- 1808. v,19,pt 2 3 ) za.be- 177 nol CATALOGING RULES 17 Corresponding title analytic Sher son) : [Pt3 (The) rivals: a comedy in five aots. Ldan, R:B. C B. 3 (In Inchbald, Mrs Elizabeth (Simp- sd. British theatre. 1808. v. 19 ) 18 Main entry for anonymous book, showing two groups of main paging W52. voya a,nd .{iel off Western coast of Africa: Journal of ficer under Capt.Owen; Records of a ge in the ship Dryad, in 1830, 1331 1832, by Peter Leonard. Phil. ke, 1833. 124, I77p. I7ixl0cm. ig Author analytic 3\G W52 Dryad tion tradje Mie Leonard, Peter. Records of a voyage to the western oaajt of Afrioa, in His Majesty's ship and of the servioe on that sta- for the suppression of the slave in... 1830, 1831 and 1832. Phil. 1833. 177p. 17-^xlOcm. (In Western coast of Ajfrica. 1833. c pt 2 3 ) Ike, 20 Corresponding subject analytic S\fc W52 soast Cryai tion trade idle SCAVE TRADE. Leonard, Peter. Records of a voyage to the western of Africa, in His Majesty's ship , and of the servioe on that sta- for the suppression of the slave , in. ..1830, 1831 and 1832. Phil, 1833. 177p. 17|-xl0cra. (In Western coast Of Ajfrica. 1833. ,pt 2 3 ) 178 like, ANALYTICS nol-m 21-22 Half-title-page without imprint 21 Author analytic in a set, main entry for which is under title 822.0B v.6 Milton, John, 1608-1674. Samson Agonistes: a tragedy. 52p. 16jxl0om. (In Select plays from oelebrated authors. 1802-04. v. 6 pt |3 3 ) 22 Corresponding title analytic 8Z2.08 Samson Agonistes: a tragedy. Milton, John. (In Seleot plays from celebrated au- thois. 1802-04. v. 6(pt 3 3 ) m Both continuous and separate paging. Occasionally, e. g. in a series of monographs, each part is paged separately but the volume is also paged continuously. In such cases the full collation for the analytic should be given before the curves but also the in- clusive paging inside the curves (unless the analytic occupies a whole volume) as the part is thus most easily found. 2 S~ 2 5 Both continuous and separate paging 23 Author analytic in a set for which main entry is made under title 305 v.3C> Kell]y, Caleb Guyer, 1887- ... French Protestantism, 1559-1562. Bait). Johns Hopkins press, 1918. 185p. 24om. (In Johns Hopkins uni- versity, studies in historical and politi- sal science. 1918. v. 36, no. 4, p. (409 3 - 593) 179 CATALOGING RULES 24 Corresponding subject analytic 305 J&5 v.36 Sellhr 3alt HUGUENOTS. C.G. 1887- ... French Protestantism, 1559-1562. . Johns Hopkins press, 1918. 185p. 24cra. (In Johns Hopkins uni- /ers'ity st\adies in historical and politi- cal 'science. 1316. v. 36, no. 4, p. (409j- 593) 25 Corresponding title analytic 505 v. 36 Kelljy in 1918 ..Frenoh Protestantism, 1559-1562. 1918. . > C.G. (In Johns Hopkins university studies historical and political science. v.36, no. 4, p.,409 3 -593) n Analytic within an analytic. Sometimes it is desirable to make an analytic within an analytic, e. g. for a part of a volume which is itself a distinct work in a set. It is generally found most satisfactory to refer from the last analytic to the work with which it is most directly connected; with a note in the ordinary form, to indicate the relation to the main work; e. g. 26-27 Analytic within an analytic 26 Form recommended for general use 5\0.fc IT. 81 udldel, Ulrich, 1510?-?1579. (A) true and agreeable description of some principal Indian lands and islands... (In bominguez, L.L. ed. Conquest of the rivet Plate, 1535-1555. 1391. p. c l 3 -91) In the Hakluyt society's Works, 1891, 180 ANALYTICS Iion-O As shown in the illustration above, Schmidel's work constitutes the first part of a volume edited by Dominguez, a volume which in itself constitutes v. 81 of the Works of the Hakluyt society. Another method which may be used is the reference from the final analytic directly back to the main work, paying no attention to the intermediate work (see sample below) but this method is not recommended, as it is the intermediate work with which the final analytic is more closely associated and in which it might be printed in another edition entirely independent of any connection with what for the edition in hand is treated as the main entry. 2/ Alternative method; not recommended for general use 5\0.6 v.8\ infidel, Ulrich, 1510?-?1579. (A) true and agreeable description of somej prinoipal Indian lands and islands... (In Hakluyt society, London. Works, 189:1a v. 81, p. c l 3 -91) When analytics are made for parts of continuations (e. g. periodicals or, as in this case, society publications, which will be discussed later) it is customary and preferable to give in the reference to the main entry, merely the date of the special volume referred to, but an alternative method is to give the date of the first volume of the set, followed by a short dash and a space, e. g. (In Hakluyt society, London. Works. 1847- v.Si.p.fij-c.l). o Short form analytics. When the part of the book for which analytic entry is to be made has no separate title, or too many chapter titles, and its contents are sufficiently well indicated by the title of the whole book it is better to use what may be called the short form analytic. In this form, instead of using for the analytic a separate title with a reference to the main work, the title of the main work only is given. The short form analytic is often the best not only when the analytic has no separate title or too many chapter titles and the contents are satisfactorily covered by the main title, but also in many cases when it has a separate title but one which adds to the main title or subject heading no information concerning the scope or phase of the subject treated, so that the employment of both main and analytic titles involves useless repetition. These cases 181 no 0-0(2) CATALOGING RULES occur most often under the names of persons as subjects (see sample cards 28-29 below). The short form analytic might under some conditions be adopted for all subject analytics, as the principal point would be covered by the fact that the subject named in the heading was treated in a certain specified part of the book, but the long form analytic is much more satisfactory if the author of the analytic is different from the author of the book as a whole, or if the analytic has a distinct title which gives desirable information not given by the main title of the book. (1) Continuous paging. In the case of continuously paged short form analytics, the main title is followed after a centi- meter space by the imprint date, and again after a centimeter space by inclusive paging. 28-29 Long and short form analytics contrasted; continuous paging 28 Long form B RUSKIN, JOHN, 1819-1900. T3\2r Rite hie, A. C I. .3 (Thackeray) lady, 1338-1918. John Ruskin. (In her Records of Tenn yson, Ruskin, Browning. 1393, p.c61 3 - 135) (or better) 2Q Short form B T3\2r RUSKIN, JOHN, 1319-1900. Ritchie, A. C I. . 3 (Thackeray) lady, 1838-1918. Records of Tennyson, Ruskin, Brown- ing. 1893. p.c61 3 -135. (2) Separate paging. In the case of separately paged short form analytics (whether for one or more entire volumes or for the separately paged part of a volume) the title is followed after a centimeter space by the imprint date for the whole work; then on the next line, at the second indention (the regular position for the collation), by the number of (when only one) the volume or 182 ANALYTICS 110 o(2)-p(2> the part comprising the analytic, and (separated by a comma, ex- cept when brackets are used, but with only the single typewriter space regularly used between items) the collation for the analytic, as pt 2, 76p. illus. 21cm. If two or more volumes or parts are covered by the analytic the inclusive volumes or parts should be given, as v. 2-3 ; but the paging should be omitted unless continuous. jo Separate paging: short form 530 05\ ftSTRONOMT- Dlaeked, Denison, 1791-1859. Rudiment 3 of natural philosophy and aetrpnoray. . . stereotyped ed. 1853. pt 3, 115p. illus. tables, diagrs. 15-Job. p Alternative methods. (1) A. L. A. code. Suggestions for the adaptation of printed cards for analytics are included in the A. L. A. rules, p. 79-80. A slight variation would be the omission of the slanting line which, in the sample shown, gives at first the impression of a canceled card. (2) New York state library. The method adopted by the New York state library for printed cards is the insertion of the page reference before the printed entry. 31-32 New York state library method of adapting printed cards 31 Title analytic ovt'^' Herb mol y and heartsease, see p.£51 3 - Eenson, Arthur Christopher, 1S62- Escape, and other essays, by Arthur Christopher Bon- son ... New York, The Century co., 1915. xviii, 302 p. 20"" $1.50 Reprinted in part from Century magazine and Cornhill magazine. Contents.— Escape.— Literature and life.— The new poets.— Walt U'hit- man.-Charm.-St.n5et.-The house of Pengersick.-Villages.-Dreams - Ilic visitant.-That other one.-Schooldays.-Authorship.-Herb moly and heartsease.— Behold, this dreamer comcth. 183 liop(2)-(3) CATALOGING RULES 32 Subject analytic PHILOSOPHY. BIBLIOGRAPHY, see p. 431-440 in 101 Perry, Ralph Barton, 1S76- ^"k The approach to philosophy, by Ealph Barton Perry . . . New York, C. Scribner's sons, 1905. xxiv, 448 p. 19} cm Bibliography: p. 431-440. As shown in sample 32, the New York state library, for the sake of having the use of the full length of the line, carries its subject headings back to the left edge of the card. (3) Wisconsin library school. The Wisconsin li- brary school rules give the paging below the call number, instead of in the curves. 184 INDEPENDENTS III-H3 INDEPENDENTS 111 Definition. Books or pamphlets published separately and afterwards bound together, such consolidation not being a part of the publisher's work. The phrase "published separately", as here used, refers to the exact copies in hand, not (as when used with reference to analytics) merely to the same material, at some time published separately. 112 Independents vs separately paged analytics, a Analytics. The separately paged analytic is a part of the book as published and belongs in all copies of that edition. b Independents. The independent is one of two or more publica- tions issued separately, and afterwards bound together. Of such a combination there may be only a single copy ; if there are dupli- cates each must be prepared individually. c Distinguishing marks. These may appear in the book, showing clearly whether it is a case for analytic or independent treatment, but such marks are sometimes entirely lacking and the treatment must be settled simply in accordance with the cataloger's judgment. In cases of uncertainty the independent is to be preferred. (1) Analytic treatment. This may be indicated in various ways ; e. g. a title-page mentioning both works, a preface or table of contents treating of both, a cover title (but not necessarily a binder's title or label) including both, continuous numbering of signatures, or (in the case of unnumbered signatures) the begin- ning of a new group of page numbers in the same signature with a previous group. (2) Independent treatment. This may sometimes be determined by the cataloger's knowledge of the previous history of the parts, as, for example, that the parts have been combined by the library or by some individual, but the decision often rests merely on the appearance of the book. A difference in size or publisher or a wide discrepancy in dates may serve as evidence, but frequently there is no means of actually establishing the facts. 113 Treatment of independents as distinguished from analytics. Catalog completely, as though an entirely separate work, each part decided on as an independent, but make the follow- ing exceptions in minor details. 185 H3a-e(i) CATALOGING RULES a Size. Give for size, not the size of the cover, as in the case of separate books, but the size of the page of the special work be- ing cataloged. As independents of quite different sizes are sometimes bound together this method gives a better bibliographic description than the use of the cover size. If the difference between the size of the publication and the size of the cover is so great as to affect the place of shelving this difference may be indicated in a note; e. g. Covers, 26cm. b Tracing for the volume as a whole. Consider the main card for one of the independents (generally the first) as being the main card for the volume and on this give the accession number of the volume, the tracing for added entries for that separate publication, and the number of other sets of cards for the volume, specifying the headings for the main cards for the different sets fully enough to make it easy to find them. If the same heading is used for more than one set the statements should be combined, as "3 sets under Gray, H. M.", or if additional sets have the same author heading as the first, "2 other sets under Thorpe." In case the volume calls for so many different sets of cards that they can not all be satisfactorily traced on the main card a separate official record may be kept (as suggested for the tracing of very numerous analytics, section 110/(4) ) referring to this list in the place for the tracing, as "27 other sets ; see official list". c Tracing of added entries for independents other than the first. The main card for each of the other independents takes the tracing for its own added entries but no accession number. d Note of contents on main card. On the main card for (gener- ally) the first independent, i. e. the card regarded as the main card for the volume, add a note mentioning the other independents. (1) If the volume contains only one or two additional works give on the main card the note "Bound with" (specifying the authors and titles of the others) as, "Bound with the author's Auto- crat of the breakfast table" or "Bound with the Deserted village, by Oliver Goldsmith ; and Sesame and lilies, by John Ruskin". Some- times the form of note works out better by the use of the possessive pronoun or the author's name in the possessive, as "his Autocrat of the breakfast table" or "John Ruskin's Sesame and lilies". (2) If more than two additional independents are included in the volume, give on the main card a more general note, as "Bound with other pamphlets". c Note of contents on other cards. (1) When the volume con- tains only two or three independents give on all cards for inde- 186 INDEPENDENTS 113 pendents other than the first a note mentioning the other work when only one or the other two when the volume contains two other works ; as, "Bound with his Letters from British settlers, and his Taxes on knowledge." If two titles are mentioned in the note indicate the author, if known, with each. Otherwise it may not be clear whether they are by the same author or whether the author of one of them is unknown. If this note is not given on all cards for other independents than the first, the reader who, wishing one of these, sends for the volume and on opening it sees a different title may not recognize the book as the one called for. For this reason the first publication in the book should be named first. (2) When the volume contains more than three independents give on all cards for all independents other than the first a note naming the first with an allusion to the others; as, "Bound with Lowell's Vision of Sir Launfal, and other pamphlets". 1 Main card 613.1 jGrl^com, John Hoskins 3 1809-1874. Uses and abuses of air. ..with remarks on the ventilation of houses. . .[3d ed. 3 N.Y.I Redfield, 1854. j252p. illus. 13 col.pl. 19cm. |3ound with Punishment, not preven- tive!, not reformatory. 2 Subject card £13.1 AIR. [Oriajcom, J:H. 3 on N.Y. 1809-1874. Uses and abuses of air... with remarks ventilation of houses. . .[3d ed. 3 Redfield, 1854. 252p. illus. 12 col.pl. 19cm. the (a) b Treatment of all as analytics. If the preference is to treat all as analytics it is recommended that for those which are really independents some such method as the following be adopted. Since analytic treatment presupposes a main entry for the book as a whole, it is desirable that there be a general title-page, with such a collective title as will best cover the contents of the volume. If the volume is put together by the library a manuscript title-page and table of contents are best prepared at that time and bound in. If the volume has been bound up without these it is best to supply them and paste them in, though in some libraries the catalog- ing is in such cases done from the binder's title. If the latter pro- cedure is followed a note should be added to the entries for the book as a whole ; i. e. Cataloged from binder's title. (1) T i 1 1 e-p a ge s. It will be found most satisfactory to have the supplied title-pages prepared on the usual plan for printed title- pages of books of similar contents, with a collective title indicating the scope of the contents of the volume, the author's name or authors' names, if the publications are all by the same author or joint authors (or several independent authors may be named if the title is such as to show that their work is independent and not of a joint author character) and imprint date (or inclusive dates, if issued in different years). Place (or places) of publication may, if desired, also be used, but it is not desirable that the publisher's name be given (even if the parts are all from the same publisher), since that item would imply that the volume was issued by the publisher in that combined form. Even the manuscript title-page would not necessarily correct that impression, since such a title- page might be used to take the place of one which was lost. (2) Contents. 1 In the table of contents the items should follow the order of the arrangement in the volume, each item be- ing numbered, with a corresponding number placed on the publica- tion. Following this number should be given the name of the author (unless the contents are all the work of the same author or joint authors) and the title of the separate publication. The number of pages and the imprint date may, if desired, be added but they arc not generally important here, as they are in each ease given on the catalog cards for the separate publication. (3) Cataloging. (a) Main entry. The cataloging should be done from the supplied title-page, treating it as though it were 1 The table of contents is equally desirable if tbc volume is treated as made up of independents. 189 "4b(3)(a)-(c) CATALOGING RULES the ordinary printed title-page, except that some such note should be added as, Manuscript title-page supplied. Entry should be made under the author's name if the works are all of the same authorship ; otherwise the form for the main entry should be determined as in section 109a(3). After the title, transcribed according to the usual rules, the place or places, if not more than three, of publication may be given ; if more than three, the phrase "Various places" may be used. If the contents of the volume are the output of several publishers the phrase "Various publishers" may be given, but the names of publishers should not be given since the proper inference from the specification of their names would be that they were responsible for the volume as that volume, when they were merely responsible for its individual parts. The extreme imprint dates, in inclusive form, should be given, as this item would, specially on the subject side, frequently be some indication of the value of the collection. As in the case of a regular publication with several groups of paging, these, if not more than three, may be specified, separated by a comma. If there are more than three, "v.p." may be used, meaning "various pagings". Such a statement regarding illustra- tions should be made as applies to the volume as a whole, and the size given in accordance with the size of the covers. Contents should regularly be given. (&) Added entries for the book as a whole. When the volume as a whole deals with one or more subjects, subject entries should be made as for other books. Other added entries for the volume as a whole would seldom if ever be called for, as in the nature of the case these would ordinarily apply merely to individual parts. (c) Analytics. For the separate parts of the volume, analytic entries should be made to such extent as is called for in the in- dividual cases, but because of the parts having been published separately the analytics should be made with more than usual liberal- ity, specially the author analytics. Subject analytics are not generally important if the subject of the separate part is the same as the subject of the volume as a whole, the contents statement on the general subject card usually being sufficient, but if the author of the separate part is an authority on the subject it may be desirable to make a separate subject entry on that account. If the separate part deals with a distinct topic it should be given a distinct subject entry. This applies, contrary to the usual principle, even when the topic is one which is naturally included in the broader subject of the volume as a whole, just be- 190 INDEPENDENTS II4b(3)(c)-(e) cause the part has been published separately and is therefore likely to be looked for under its specific subject designation. Analytics for titles, editors etc. should be made according to the general principles, with special recognition of the fact that the parts have been separately published and that consequently the features of the parts are more than otherwise likely to be separately remembered. (d) Form of analytic entry. The analytic entries should take the same form as previously prescribed for separately paged analyt- ics, with a reference in ( ) to the main entry for the book. (e) Tracing. The entries should be traced, as in the case of other separately paged analytics. 191 115 CATALOGING RULES ADDED EDITIONS 115 Definition of edition. The definition of edition given in the A.L. A. rules, pref. p. 14, "The whole number of copies printed from the same set of types and issued at the same time", is sub- stantially the same as that given by the Century, Standard and Webster, but some such explanatory statement as the following, which is taken from Webster, makes the definition more directly applicable to ordinary cataloging usage. To the definition "The whole number of copies of a work printed and published at one time" is added "usually distinguished from an impression. In edi- tions after the first, corrections, additions or alterations of the text are made, or the type reset ; a second or succeeding impression is from the unaltered original plates". A definition limited strictly to copies "issued at the same time" must be regarded as based wholly on the earlier method of printing from movable type and the subsequent distribution of the type, in- volving its resetting for a reissue, which was therefore properly a new edition. With the advances in printing, for a large proportion of the books plates are made corresponding to the pages. These plates are stored and used for reprints which, corresponding exactly to the original, are not properly editions, as brought out in the sup- plementary statement in Webster. Such reprints may be designated as different impressions, issues, reissues or thousands, but these distinctions are of value only for minute bibliographic descriptions and are generally disregarded in library cataloging. In many cases, however, such reprints appear as numbered "editions", but as it is often impracticable to distinguish between such reprints and really new editions it is best to accept for these the publishers' term. In Cutter, p. 19, is the following: "Edition, a number of copies of a book, published at the same time and in the same form. A later publication of the same book unchanged is sometimes styled a different edition, sometimes a new issue, sometimes a different thousand." The phrase "in the same form", is an important sup- plement to the phrase "at the same time", as a large paper or some other special edition might be "printed from the same set of types and issued at the same time". For cataloging purposes different editions are those which are subject to some difference in the description on the cards, even though this difference is nothing more than the imprint date. Importance of indicating edition. The importance of noting the edition is stated by Cutter (rule 255) as follows: "The specification of edition is 192 ADDED EDITIONS "5""7 necessary, (i) for the student, who often wants a particular edition and cares no more for another than he would for an entirely different work, (2) in the library service, to prevent the rejection of works which are not really duplicates. And the number of the edition is a fact in the literary history of the author worth preserving under his name; under the subject it is some guarantee for the repute, if not for the value, of the work." a Editions vs copies. Exact duplicates are called copies and this term is, according' to the policy of the library, extended to include varying degrees of duplication, many libraries using the term to cover, in fiction, entirely different editions unless the number of volumes differs or there is some variation in the division into volumes or there is some special reason for distinguishing a certain edition, as in the case of specially fine illustrations or of an edition sufficiently well known to be called for in preference to others. Under this plan for the treatment of fiction the entire statement of imprint and collation is omitted, except the number of volumes when more than one. When the distinguishing feature consists of the illustrations or editor etc. it may be best brought out in a note. For a fuller discussion of the treatment of fiction see Appendix 1. 116 Definition of added edition. As defined in Cutter, p. 13, an added edition is "another edition of a work already in the cata- log." 117 Treatment of added editions. When an edition is added to the library it is customary, when practicable, to add the catalog entry to the cards already made, thus procuring the double ad- vantage of economy of labor and a compact presentation of the entries to the eye of the reader. When an edition is to be added to cards already made the extra entry should be made on all cards to which it applies, according to directions a-h given below, subject to such variations in fulness of entry as are called for by the different kinds of cards. It is bet- ter to omit a line between entries when there is room, except on series cards, where the regular rule for arrangement in series should be followed. An exception to the general method for adding editions must frequently be made on series cards; i. e. if the work to which an edition is to be added is the latest entered on the series card the regular rule for added editions is followed, but if, on the series card, entries for other works follow the original entry for the work in question, it is generally best to make, on the series card, the entry for the added edition as an entirely distinct entry, fol- lowing those already made. For the entry of added editions on the author card only, see Cutter, 179, but notice that the illustrations are for very special cases. 193 II7a-b(3) CATALOGING RULES a Author's name. Indicate the repetition of the author's name by a dash about one centimeter long, beginning at the outer inden- tion, at the height of the top of lower case letters, on manuscript cards. On typewritten cards the dash should be used if there is one on the machine; otherwise the hyphen, not the underline. No account need be taken of the point if one edition is published under the author's name and one anonymously, nor of a different fulness of author's name on different title-pages. b Title. Indicate the repetition of the title by the word Same (underlined) to represent either the whole title or merely the title proper, according to the correspondence between the two title-pages. Write this word after the dash, at the distance of the ordinary space between words, on either manuscript or typewritten cards. By the "title proper" is here meant that part of the title which precedes the statement of edition. In some libraries, instead of the word Same a second dash is used, one centimeter in length, following the dash representing the author's name, at a distance of one typewriter space. (1) Titles wholly or partly identical. If the whole title is identical the word Same is sufficient to indicate the repe- tition, but if only the title proper is identical, some variation occurring in the statement of edition, the word Same should be used to repre- sent only the title proper and the statement of edition should be written out in the same fulness as would be used if the entry stood alone on the card, the semicolon being used to separate this state- ment from the word Same, as though, instead of the latter, the title was written out. (2) Longer entries added to shorter. If the original entry contains no statement of the edition and the second entry contains such a statement, the second may be added to the first, with the supplementary information added, but if the earlier entry has a statement of edition and the later entry has no such statement the later entry should not be added to the earlier and longer entry, as the word Same would in this case imply the repeti- tion of the entire previous title. A longer title proper may be added to a shorter by adding, after the word Same, the supplementary information (unless this would result in awkward phraseology) or by the use of . . . (3) More than two editions. When two editions are already given on the card, if the first entry has no statement of edi- tion and the second has such a statement, subsequent editions lack- ing such a statement should not be added as they would be likely to be understood as corresponding to the second entry, but if the 194 ADDED EDITIONS II7b(3>-d first entry has no statement of edition and the second and following entries have such a statement, in order to avoid any possible mis- understanding on the part of the reader, it is safest to write out the statement of edition with each, even though the wording is exactly the same. (4) Different editors. Although the rule for adding editions to a card when there is a variation in the statement of edition, would allow on the same card the combination of editions by different editors, this would not generally be advisable, as the library which would have editions by different editors might also have extra editions by the same editor and it would therefore be better to give separate cards to editions by different editors. (5) Slight variations in title. In libraries doing minute bibliographic work it would be undesirable to allow even very slight variations to pass under the word Same , but for most libraries serving mainly a miscellaneous public it would not be im- portant to observe such variations, e. g. French revolution in 1848 and French revolution of 1848, or the omission in a later entry of a subtitle or alternative title. When ... are used in the earlier entry to indicate omissions, they may be disregarded in applying the word Same, considering this as covering only the actual writ- ten words. Correspondingly ... to indicate the series note etc. at the head of the title-page for the additional entry need not be used before the word Same. When different editions are being cataloged at the same time, occasionally the titles may be shortened with special reference to agreement in the catalog entries, provided that nothing very important is thereby omitted. c Imprint, collation and series note. On the main card and sub- ject cards write, in the regular full form for such cards, the imprint, one centimeter (four typewriter spaces) after the title, and on the following line, in their regular position, the full collation and the series note. On the other cards (title, editor, etc.) write the imprint date (or its substitute) one centimeter after the title, and on the same- line, again at the distance of one centimeter, the number of volumes if more than one. These details are given with each entry, even if they are identical with those in the edition previously cataloged. d Notes. Notes should be given with each entry as applicable, except that notes given with the first entry may be referred to in the later entries if they are equally applicable to these and ap- preciable space is thereby saved; as, "For notes of biography and 195 H7d-h CATALOGING RULES bibliography see entry above" or "Contents as in entry above except for the addition of the following:" (giving supplementary items). Occasionally, if thought important for the sake of distinguishing editions (for example, two of the same date) such notes may be added on short-entry cards (e. g. title or editor) as would not ordinarily be given ; as "London ed." and "New York ed." or the series note may be given after the imprint and collation or the name of the edition may be given in the title. e Treatment of author's name and of title on main vs secondary cards. The indication of the author's name by a dash, followed by the word Same, representing the title, is common to all cards, no attempt being made to indicate a repetition of the heading for sub- ject or editor cards, etc. (1) Title cards. On the title card this arrangement re- verses the regular order for title cards but the reader will not analyze this detail and the opposite arrangement, though more logical, would, by its appearance, be confusing. f Order of entries. The later edition would naturally follow an earlier, but if the later one was cataloged before the earlier one came to hand the earlier would be added to the later except when some difference in title made this undesirable. When different edi- tions are being cataloged at the same time, if the later edition has the shorter title it is sometimes desirable for that reason to give it the first place on the card, regardless of the date. Differences in imprint, collation or series need not be considered in the order of entries. g Call numbers. The call number for each edition is given at the left edge of the card, opposite its own entry. h Accession numbers. Accession numbers for all editions cata- loged should be given on the back of the main card and should be distinguished; as, 1124 ed. 7 1848 Edin. or or 1956 " 9 1865 Lond. While some distinguishing mark should be given with the acces- sion number for each edition, the different editions on a card do not always lend themselves to the same treatment, e. g. the number of the edition may be given with one edition and a publisher or series note with another. 196 ADDED EDITIONS i Author card "7 2se> H22 livered 1899 dere & N. H22& Harnaok, Adolf, 1851- What la Christianity? 16 lectures de- in the University of Berlin... -1900; tr...by Thomas -Bailey Saun- 3d and rev.ed. Lond* Williams 1904 c c, 01 3 306p. 19om. (Crown theological li- brary) Same ; 2d ed.rev. N.'Y, Putnam •1910,cioi 3 333p. 19om. brarjy) (Crown theological li- 2 Subject card 233 H22 233 422a Harnaok er liv 1899 ders & N. brary) CHRISTIANITY. , Adolf, 1851- What is Christianity? 16 lectures de- ed in the University of Berlin. . . -1900; tr...by Thomas Bailey Saun- 3d and rev.ed. Lond, Williams 1904 c c'01 a 306p. 19om. (Crown theological 11- Same ; 2d ed.rev. 191<&, c, 01 a 322p. 19cm. braiy) !*.Y. Putnam (Crown theological li- 7 197 ii7 CATALOGING RULES 3 Translator card The entries on cards 3-4 are designed to represent a case where il was desirable, on making the second entry, to distinguish the editions in some other way than by the date. The edition first cataloged was the third, while the added edition was the second, but the third edition was published in 1904, while the copy in hand of the second edition, as shown on the back of the title-page, was reprinted in 1910, from an earlier issue, so that the use of the dates would, by itself, be misleading. Consequently on the short-entry cards a note of the edition was added to the entry previously made, and a statement of the edition included in the title for the added entry, in order to show the actual relation of the two editions. 1V5 H22 2^ H22a Ham Saunders, Thomas Bailey, tr. aok, Adolf. What is Christianity? 3d ed. ■ Same; 2d ed. r 1910i 1860- 1904. 4 Title card 1233 tt22 253 H22a hat is Christianity? rlarnlaok, Adolf. 3d ed. Same ; 2d ed, c 1910j 1904, 198 INDEXES, KEYS, SUPPLEMENTS, ATLASES, PORTFOLIOS Il8 INDEXES, KEYS, SUPPLEMENTS, ATLASES AND PORTFOLIOS 118 Treated like added editions. a Indexes and keys. Sep- arately published indexes and keys are to be treated like added editions, with the dash to represent the original author, and the word Same the original title, these being followed (generally after a comma) by the additional title of the index or key, including the name of the editor or compiler, for whom an added entry should be made. b Supplements. Supplements should be treated in the same way unless so distinct as to fall under A. L. A. rules, 14, namely: Enter a continuation which is in the form of an independent work with separate title, whether printed with the original or not, under the name of its own author, with a reference from the author of the original work. (For illustrations see A. L. A. rules.) c Atlases and portfolios. An atlas or portfolio, which has a title differing from that of the main work, or which has a special editor or compiler, may, if desired, be treated like a supplement, as an alternative to the method suggested in 15^(2) and \6e. Index, with main entry under author KG4- KG4- v.o lein, JiUliua, Lcscpoldj 1810-187 6. Gescnichte des drama's. Lpz. Wei- gel, 1865-76. 13v.in 15, 21cm. Same , Register-band. .. bearb. von The- odor Ebner. " Lpz. Weigel, 1886. 128p. 21om. v.O Ebner, Theodor, 1856- 3lQ« J.L. Geaohiohte des drama's, Register- band. 1886. ed. 199 "8 CATALOGING RULES Index and supplement, with main entry under title Hanging indention 032 <*E5 032. q ,E5 ru v.o 032. E5 I v. 25-25 Encyclopaedia britannica; a dictionary of arts, sciences arid general literature; 9th ed.' Edin. Black, 1875-S9. 24v. illus. plates (partly col.), maps, plans, diagrs. 38-Joa. Samej., Index to; with list of contributors and key to their initials. Edin. Black, 18S9, 499p. 28 Jem. Same); New American supplement. .. ed. under ...supervision of Day Otis Kellogg.., N.Y. Werner/"^) 1900. 5v. illus. V_y ports, maps, 37jca. 03Z a Es Ency- 1J V.25-2T' Kellogg, Day Otis, ed, clopaedia britannica; New American supplement. 1900. 5v. (or) 200 INDEXES, KEYS, SUPPLEMENTS, ATLASES, PORTFOLIOS n8 Paragraph indention; treatment as for anonymous book 032 032 q,L5 0^2 Q,E5 Ml v. 2.5-2 under e 2 ° Kellogg Encyclopaedia britannioa: a diction- siry of arts, ' scienoes and general litera- ture!; 9th ed. Edin. Black, 1875-89. 24v. illus. platee (partly col.), aaps, plans, diagrs. 28|cm. Same , Index to; with li9t of cont rib- Ed in, ators and key to their initials. Black, 1889. 499p. 28jcm. Same ; New American supplement. .. eo. 3 r... super- (\ vision of Day Otis ogg. .. v-^N.Y. Werner. 1900. 5v. illus. ports. map3, 27-^cm. 032 % E5 v.^5-^ Kellogg, Day Otis, ed. can Encyclopaedia britannioa; New Ameri- supplement. 1900. 5v. 201 II9-I2I CATALOGING RULES PERIODICALS 119 Definitions. The following definitions are taken from the A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 15-16. Periodical: A publication intended to appear in successive numbers or parts at more or less regular intervals and, as a rule, for an indefinite time. Each part properly contains matter on a variety of topics, generally by several contributors. Newspapers, and the Memoirs, Proceedings, Journals, etc. of societies are not considered regular periodicals under the rules. Serial: A publication issued in successive parts, usually at regular intervals, and, as a rule, intended to be continued indefinitely. Serials include periodicals, annuals (reports, year-books, etc.) and memoirs, proceedings and transactions of societies. 120 General treatment. The directions given below, based on A. L. A. rules, 121, are designed to cover the main features of the cataloging of periodicals. More detailed specifications, showing the practice of the catalog division of the Library of Congress, are to be found in its Guide to the cataloguing of periodicals, pre- pared by Mary Wilson MacNair, 1918, with which the following directions are for the most part in accord, but some slight differences have here been adopted, with a view to briefer forms or because some variation seemed better adapted to manuscript or typewritten cards. Tor the cataloger in whose work periodicals constitute an important feature the Guide mentioned above corresponds to those books which in general parlance '"no gentleman's library should be without". 121 Form entry- In Cutter, 192, it is suggested that "form entry" be made under Periodicals, or under English periodicals, French periodicals, etc., but the infrequency with which the users of most libraries care to know all the periodicals in a library makes this policy very questionable as a general practice. In a small library a list of the periodicals may be bulletined and a reference to this made in the catalog under the heading Periodicals. In a large library a more practical method would be a general reference; as, 202 PERIODICALS I2i-I24a(l) PERIODICALS. For general periodicals 3ee their ie|s; as, Century magazine For periodicals on a special subject 3e e name of that subject, subhead PERI- ODICALS; as, EDUCATION- PERIODICALS 122 Fulness of description. The many variations liable to occur among the different volumes of a serial set make it im- practicable to give as minute bibliographic descriptions for pe- riodicals as for books in general, while the wide distribution of periodicals makes their contents and character more generally known than is the case with other works, and a full and exact de- scription consequently less important. 123 Groups. Periodicals may, for cataloging, be divided into three groups : a Those which have ceased publication and of which the library has complete sets For these the cataloging follows the same general plan as for other books in several volumes, but certain exceptions are made to correspond to the treatment required for current periodicals and incomplete sets, as specified below. b Those which are still being published, and of which the library sets are complete to date c Those of which the library sets are incomplete, either period- icals which have ceased publication or those which are still being published 124 Complete finished sets, a Main entry. Make the main entry under the title. (1) Position. Begin on the top line, using either (a) hang- ing indention, following the form given on the Library of Congress cards, or (b) paragraph indention, in accordance with general earlier usage. If hanging indention is used begin the title at the outer indention, with inner indention for all subsequent lines of the entry. If paragraph indention is preferred begin the title at the second indention, coming back to the outer indention for subsequent lines of title and imprint. 203 I24a(i)-(2)(c) CATALOGING RULES This second form, using regular title indention, corresponds for the main entry to the treatment of anonymous books with author unknown, except that the entry begins on the top line, a divergence justified by the fact that for periodicals not only will no author's name ever be filled in, but periodicals constitute a large class of publications and it seems undesirable to lose needlessly the use of the top line for so many entries. (2) Titl e. As variations are likely to occur on the title-pages of different volumes it simplifies the cataloging to include on the cards for all periodicals only those parts of the title which are really important, either as standing out prominently in the title proper or as showing the scope of the work. The latter point may often be covered by a condensation of the descriptive part of the title. With complete, finished sets the cataloger has before him all the title-page variations which must be taken into account, and, with this definite knowledge of the facts, can shorten the title more to his satis- faction than when dealing with possibilities, but it is convenient to have the same general rules cover, as far as possible, both finished and unfinished sets, and it is with this in mind that these directions have been prepared. As a general principle, omissions from the title should be made as freely as may be done without the loss of any information which is of real value as a part of the title. (a) Frequency of publication. When the frequency of publica- tion is given as an integral part of the title proper (e. g. Quarterly journal of economics, or Atlantic monthly) and not merely as a descriptive term, it is necessary to retain it, but otherwise it is better to omit it from the title and give it in a note, as this is a detail very liable to change. When there is a change in the frequency of publication of a periodical which includes this as an integral part of the title, the case comes under the treatment for "Changed titles", given below, as section 131. (b) Editors. For editors also it is better to omit the names from the title and give in a note instead. (c) Dates covered by volumes. It is well to give in the title on the cards for periodicals which have ceased publication and of which the library sets are complete, the inclusive dates covered from beginning to end of publication, supplying these dates in brackets when not given on the title-page. If dates are given on either the first or last volume and not on the other the missing date should be supplied in brackets. If the dates used do not coincide with the beginning and end of the years it is desirable to include the names of the months in this title-date statement, bracketing if not given on the title-page. 204 PERIODICALS 1243(2) (d)-(4) (a) (d) Abbreviations for months. For names of months the com- mon abbreviations should be used. O) Information supplied or omitted. If information is actually supplied in the title, e. g. the name of the month, it should be bracketed, but, in view of possible variations on title-pages, the . . . need not be used to indicate omissions. (3) Imprint. Give place and publisher as usual, if they remain unchanged throughout the set. (a) Place changed. Changes in place of publication are less frequent than changes in publisher, for which directions are given below under "(b) Publisher changed", which rules may be adapted, as far as needed, to changes in place. (b) Publisher changed. When a set is published by a firm which has changed its name, the name may be given as in the first volume, followed by [etc.] or if there has been only one change of name, both forms may be given, as "Jansen, McClurg & co. (later A. C. McClurg & co.)" When a set has had two publishers, both names may be given, as for Galaxy: "W. C. & F. P. Church, 1866-68; Sheldon & co. 1868-70," or the first or the more important may be given in the imprint, and the other mentioned in a note. If desired this method may be extended to include more than two publishers in the imprint. When a set has had several publishers, the first or most important may be given in the imprint and a note added "Several changes of publisher," or the variant publishers may be specified in the note. (c) Imprint dates. Imprint dates and copyright dates are to be given for finished, complete sets, as for any other set of books ; i. e. the first and last dates should be given, connected by a dash. When neither imprint nor copyright dates are given, dates are to be supplied in brackets, in agreement with the publication of the end of the first and last volumes. (4) Collation. The collation is given in its regular place, on the line below the imprint, at the second indention. (0) Volumes. For a finished periodical of which the library has a complete set the statement of volumes is given in the same form as for any other work ; e. g. 27v. or 18v. in 36. If the periodical ceased publication with the first volume, the volume number may be given, followed by the number of pages.; e. g. v.l, 461 p. 205 I24a(4)(b)-(5)(c) CATALOGING RULES (b) Illustrations. Illustrations are indicated only when the magazine is generally illustrated. Kinds of illustrations need not ordinarily be distinguished, all being included under the term "illus". Exceptions may in rare instances be made where the distinct kind is important as such, e. g. the plates in some specially fine scientific or art periodical, or the maps in a geographic magazine. (c) Size. If the volumes of a set are all of the same size, this may be given as usual, e. g. 26cm. ; but if there have been variations it is better to give extreme sizes only, e. g. 26-30cm., unless there has been but one change, in which case a more specific statement may be made, e. g. v. 1-7, 24cm.; v.8-19, 27cm.; or, for a noncontin- uous variation, 28cm. (v. 3, 7-10, 29cm.) For many libraries it will be more practical to omit the size entirely for periodicals, even if used for other books. (5) Notes. (a) Order of arrangement. The following order is prescribed by A. L. A. rules, 121: (i) frequency of pub- lication; (?) important variations of title; (3) successive editors; (4) important changes of place of publication and of publisher; (5) indexes, supplements etc. unless entered separately. 1 Frequency of publication. The frequency of publication should always be given in a note except when retained in the title. 2 Variations in title. Where "important variations" are indicated above, the Library of Congress phrase "Title varies" or "Title varies slightly" may be used to cover minor changes. 3 End of publication. In addition to the items specified above, for finished periodicals (generally after all other notes) should be mentioned the discontinuance, e. g. "Publication suspended" 1 (with the date) or "Merged in" or "Incorporated with" or "Superseded by" (with the name of the other periodical and the date). In notes referring to another periodical in the library the call number of the periodical referred to should be included with the title. (b) Indention. Regular paragraph indention is generally used but in some cases, if the information runs over the line, a further deep indention may be employed to allow the use of ditto marks for the phrase common to the group, thereby making these notes stand out clearly as a group (see sample card 7 below). (c ) Items combined. Occasionally some of the conditions noted occur simultaneously ; e. g. changes of title, editor, place of pub- 1 The phrase "Publication suspended" is recommended in preference to "Discontinued" or "Ceased publication" as being better fitted to the case if the publication is after an interval resumed, the note being, under those circumstances, amplified by adding a dash and the year (or the month and year) immediately preceding the resumption of publication. 206 PERIODICALS l24a(5)(c)-(7) lication and publisher. In such cases the facts may, when thought advisable, be combined in a single note. (6) Indexes, (a) Separate entry. Though provision is made under "notes" for "indexes, supplements etc. unless entered separately", it is generally best when an index covers more than one volume to enter it separately, after such other notes as are in- dicated above, following the. plan for added editions. This holds true, even if the index, instead of occupying an entire unnumbered volume, as is generally the case, occupies either a volume regularly numbered in the set or only part of a volume. (b) Method. Use the word Same to represent the title of the periodical, as is done for titles in the case of added editions. Then, after a comma, give the title of the index, with (for an index occupying a separate volume) full imprint and full collation, ac- cording to the rules for any other separate work, using (in exact work) ... and brackets according to regular rules. For an index occupying only part of a volume use a brief analytic form, as shown in sample 1 below. The name of the periodical, being represented by the word Same , need not generally be repeated in the title of the index. This omission need not be indicated by . . . unless the phrasing seems less awkward with these than with what would otherwise be used to represent the inverted arrangement, e. g. " Same, General index to; from the 20th to the 40th volumes" or "Same, General index . . . from the 20th to the 40th volumes". ^ Successive indexes follow one another like different added editions, the notes about any individual index following that indi- vidual entry. Indexes printed elsewhere. If an index to a set or a part of a set is known to have appeared elsewhere, it should, if in the library, be cataloged with the other indexes to the set, in the regular place called for by the volumes covered. If it is not in the library, as definite information as is available regarding it should be given in a note in the place for the index. The call number for the index, including the volume number, is written in the margin, opposite the index entry, as for an added edition. (7) Supplements. For a supplement consisting of a monograph, the main entry is made under the author of the mono- graph, with the title of the periodical given as a series note and with an added entry under the title of the periodical in the form of a series card. For illustrations see the Library of Congress' Guide to the cataloguing of Periodicals. 207 I24a(7)-b(3)(b) CATALOGING RULES For supplements not consisting of monographs it is generally sufficient (when they are important enough to call for any notice) to mention them in notes on the main card for the periodical, with- out making separate entries. b Added entries for subjects, editors etc. (1) Importanc e. Subject cards should be made for periodicals, as for other publica- tions, when they deal with a distinct subject. Editor cards are of little value except in the library which attempts to keep a complete record of what it has of the person's literary work, or in cases where the editor's name is prominently associated with the periodical. When the periodical is the organ of a society or other body an entry is generally made under the name of the body, in the form of a general secondary entry, a note being given on both the main card and the general secondary card, to show the relation. (2) Position. Writing the heading for the subject, editor etc. in its regular place on the top line at the second indention, begin the title of the periodical on the following line at the outer indention. If hanging indention is used on the main card, it is also used correspondingly on the secondary cards. If, on the main card, paragraph indention is used, on the secondary cards the first line of the title is, like the subsequent lines, drawn back to the first indention, which is at variance with the form on the main card, but which has the double advantage of bringing the title into a more prominent position than if it had the same indention as the heading and of avoiding the awkward appearance which results from having the heading and the item on the following line begin at the same indention. The alternative to this second form, covering the same points, would be the omission of one line after the heading, with the second indention for the title entry, but this results in dropping the entry one line and the advan- tages seem to be greater with the method outlined above. (3) For m. (a) Subject cards. The title, imprint, collation, notes and indexes are given on the subject cards for finished complete sets as on the main card, subject to such differences in title and notes as might occur with other books. (b) Editor cards. Give the editor's name according to the usual rules, bracketing such parts as do not appear on the title-pages. Variations on title-pages. If variations occur on different title-pages do not bracket parts which occur on any of the title-pages. Use a short title, inclusive imprint dates for volumes covered by the editorship represented by the card, and the inclusive volume 208 PERIODICALS i 2 4b(3)(b)-l27 numbers, as v. 1-9, unless the editorship covers the entire set, when, instead of inclusive volume numbers, the total number of volumes is given, as 9v. Editorship not continuous. If the editorship was not continuous, e. g. if the editor's work was for v.7-12 and 18-24, give only the extremes of the imprint dates but an exact statement of the volumes, using the inclusive form for the separate groups, e. g. 1892-1900. v.7-12, 18-24. (c) General secondary cards. Follow in general the same plan as for editor cards, in (b) above, but include in the title or in a note such additional information as may be needed to account for the special entry. 125 Call numbers. Call numbers should be given in their usual place, for all entries, and when applying to only part of a set, as for the editor of part of a set, the inclusive volume numbers for the exact volumes covered should be included in the call number. This rule for the inclusion of volume numbers should not, on the ground that the library has only part of the volumes, be applied on main cards and subject cards for incomplete sets (section 129 below), or on other cards for incomplete sets when all the volumes which are in the library are included in the entry. a Brackets. Brackets are not to be used for volume numbers in call numbers, even when they are used in the collation (i. e. when they are not furnished by the volumes to which they apply). 126 Accession numbers. For a periodical which ceased pub- lication after a few r volumes the accession numbers may be given in their usual place, followed by the volume numbers. For a set where there are many accession numbers, instead of specifying these numbers it is better to write in their place "See shelflist." 127 Capitalization. For capitalization follow A.L.A. rules, r?2. 209 124-127 CATALOGING RULES Sample cards 1-4 Complete finished set; hanging indention 1 Alain card 3G0.5 C47 Charjities review, Nov. 1891-Feb. 1901. N.Y. Charity organization society of the city of New York c 1392-1901 3 lOv. illu3. 33-24cra. Monthly . v.1-5 ed.by J:H. Finley. v. 3 " J :H. Finley and P.L.Ford, v. 6-7 - n F:H. Wines. v. 8-10 n H.S.Brown. v.1-5, organ of the Charity organi- society of the city of New *York; organ of the National conference of O V_y See next card zatipn 210 PERIODICALS 124-127 2 Subject card 3Q>0.5 C47 CHARITIES - PERIODICALS. Charities review, Nov. 1891-Feb. 1901. M.Y. Charity organization society of the city of New York c 1892-1901 3 lOv. illue. 33-24cm. Monthly. v. 1-5 ed.by J:H. Finley. v,3 " J :H. Finley and P.L.Ford. v.6-7 " F:H. Wines. v.8-10 " H.S.Brown. v.1-5, organ of the Charity organi-' zation sooiety of the city of New York: O ^S See next card C47 3GG.5 C47 V. 10 v.5, organ of the National conference of charities and correction. v.8-10 published by Charities review. Publication suspended July 1896-Feb. 189? tfar. Absorbed Lend a hand (360.5 L56) in 1897. Merged in Charities (360.5 C472) in ?'ar. 1901. Same , Index, y.1-10. S15) (In v.10, p. 601- Index for 0. 5^9-580; for 595. Ov.1-3 appeared in. v. 8, v.1-9 in v.9, p.532- 3 Editor card 3G0.5 C47 v. 1-5 c Finley, John Hu3ton 3 1863- ed. Chaijities review. c 1892-9 6 3 v.1-5, (Similar cards should be made for Paul Leicester Ford, for v.3; for Frederick Howard Wines, for v.6-7; and for Herbert S. Brown, for v.8-10.) 211 124-127 CATALOGING RULES 4 General secondary card 3Q>O.S Icharity organization society of the C47 oity of Hew York. v.l-5 Charjities review. c 1892-96 3 v. 1-5. Through the first five volumes the Charities review was the organ of this society. (A similar card should be made for National conference of charities and correction, for v.5.) (or) 5-6 Complete finished set; paragraph indention 5 Main card 3G0.5 C4! za V.5, Charities review, Nov. 1891-Feb. 1901. N.Y. Charity organization society of the city] of :Jew York c 18 9£- 1901 j lOv. illus. 23-24cm. Llonthly. v.l-5 ed.by JrH.Finley. v. 3 " JrH.Finley and P.L.Ford. v.6-7 n F:H. Wines. v.8-10 ■ H.S.Brown. v.l-5, organ of the Charity organi- ;i|on sooiety of the oity of New York; organ of the National conference of See next card (Extension card same as for sample I above) 212 PERIODICALS 6 Subject card i24-i28a(2)(a) 5^0.5 IC4-7 CHARITIES- PERIODICALS. Charities review, Nov. 1891-Feb. 1901. N.Y. Charity organization society of the city of New York c 1392-1901 3 lOv. illus. 23-24cm. Monthly. 7.1-5 ed.by J:H.Flnley. v.3 " J iH.Finley and P.L.Ford. v. 6-7 n F:H. Wines, v.3-10 n H.S.Brown. v. 1-5, organ of the Charity organi- zation society of the city of New York; v_y See next card (Extension card same as for sample 2 above) Editor cards and general secondary cards (Editor cards and general secondary cards would in this case be identical with the editor and general secondary cards for hanging indention (see cards 3-4 above), but if the entry for the periodical ran over the line it would with hanging indention follow the indention given for the subject in sample card 2, while for paragraph indention it would follow that shown in sample card 6.) 128 Complete current sets, a Main entry. The treatment of periodicals still being published, of which the library sets are com- plete to date, follows in general the same plan as for complete finished sets, but calls for the following variations. (1) Title. While the cataloger of the complete finished set has at hand all the variations to be considered the cataloger of the current publication must consider also the possibilities of future changes and be specially on guard against retaining unimportant phrases. (a) Dates covered. In the title should be given in ink the date of the beginning of the first volume, followed by a dash and, in pencil, the date of the end of the latest volume cataloged. When a periodical ceases publication the final date should be filled in, in ink. (2) Imprint, (a) Place and publisher. Place and publisher, as long as unchanged, are given as usual. In the case of a change in place or publisher the first or most important may be used, but 213 I28a(2)(a)-(3)(c) CATALOGING RULES if the current place or publisher is not the one given in the imprint it should be furnished in a note (added to any statement which is made regarding earlier changes of place or publisher) with the date from which it was connected with the publication ; e. g. "Pub- lished in Boston, 1899-date" ; or "Published by the International magazine company, 1897-datc" ; or "Published in Chicago by Field, Brown & co. June 1903-date'' ; the word "date" being written in pencil. In case of further change, such a statement as any of those given above should be closed by substituting for the penciled word "date" the actual date in ink, and the note extended by an additional corresponding statement giving the later information. (b) Date. The imprint date (and copyright date, if different) for the first volume may be given in ink, followed by a dash and, in pencil, the imprint date of the latest volume cataloged. i Copyright dates. A copyright date in addition to this penciled imprint date is best omitted, as its value is too slight to warrant its change with each successive change of imprint, but the final imprint date should be given in ink if the periodical ceases publication, and the final copyright date may then be added. 2 Omission of imprint dates. Since dates are given in the title they may be omitted from the imprint if desired, thus lessening the number of items to be changed. (3) Collation, (a) Volumes. The statement of volumes should be given in inclusive form, e. g. v.1-24. If in the individual library it is considered of sufficient importance that the volume statement for a periodical originally cataloged as current should, in case of discontinuance, take the regular form (e. g. 27v.) the original inclusive statement should be entirely in pencil in order to render the change easier, but if that feature is not specially desired the first part of the statement (i. e. "v.l-") may be given in ink, and merely the volume number following the dash be given in pencil, this being the part subject to continual change. If the second method is followed the final volume number should, in case the publication of the periodical is suspended, also then be given in ink. (b) Illustrations. For illustrations the same rules apply as for complete finished sets, section \24a(4)(b) above. (c) Size. In view of the liability to changes in size it is recommended that this item (if given at all) be in pencil, even if at the time of the original cataloging there has been no variation ; also that in case of variation, only the extremes be given (e. g. 26- ^ocm.) without attempting a specification of volumes except when 214 PERIODICALS l 2 8a(3)(c)-b(3) the change of size is such as to divide the set on the shelves (e. g. v.1-8, 22cm.; v.p-17, 28cm.) In such an instance as the latter the first part of the statement may be given in ink. (4) Notes. For notes the same general rules should be fol- lowed as for complete finished sets (section 124a(5) above) but to allow for adding information of the same kind as already presented in any note (i. e. frequency of publication, names of editors, changes in title, place or publisher, etc.) it is advisable to leave space. In general it would be better to give, of the notes, only the frequency of publication on the first card. If the other notes are begun on a second card and two lines or more are left between the kinds, the number being determined by the nature of the individual case and the judgment of the cataloger, the rewriting of the cards may often be long deferred. The numbering of the cards (at the top) should preferably be in pencil to permit the intercalation of cards if desirable. (5) Indexes. Indexes should (in the same form as for complete finished sets, section 124a(6) above) be cataloged on a separate card, to be filed after the cards for miscellaneous notes. b Added entries for subjects, editors etc. (1) Importance and position. For importance and position of entry see sec- tion 124&(l)-(2) above. (2) Subject. For subject cards the entries may be made to correspond in full to the main card, involving alteration with each added volume or, if it is felt that this change on the subject cards, in addition to the main cards, involves too great an expenditure of time, a reference method of treatment may be substituted as fol- lows : Under the subject heading, give a short title and, in place of the other facts given on the main card, write or stamp the note (omitting one line after the title) "For full statement of volumes in library see card beginning" (adding the entry words for the main card, making the reference full enough for identification to be reasonably sure and easy). (3) Editor cards, general secondary cards etc. Editor cards, general secondary cards etc. would in cases where the person's or institution's relation to the periodical had ceased, be treated as complete (as in sample cards 3-4 above). In cases where the relation is still current the imprint date and volume 215 I28b(3)-e CATALOGING RULES number for the first volume concerned should be given in ink 1 and the corresponding imprint date and volume number of the latest volume cataloged be given in pencil or, if preferred, in order to save repeated changes, instead of the imprint date and volume number of the latest volume, the word "date" (in pencil) may be substituted for each of these items, a change being made only when the person's or institution's relation to the periodical ceases, the statements then being closed by exact statements of the facts. Relation not continuous. For treatment when the relation of the person or institution has not been continuous see note under 124^(3) (b). (a) Brackets. If, at the time of the original cataloging, parts of the editor's name did not appear on any of the title-pages at hand and were therefore bracketed it is not important that the brackets be removed if they appear on later title-pages. c Call numbers. When volume numbers for the latest volumes of a current set are to be indicated in the call number, write the number of the first volume concerned, followed by a dash, e. g. 051 L25 v.23- See also section 125 above. d Accession numbers. For a current set, instead of specifying the accession numbers it is better to write in their place "See shelflist". e Periodical no longer received. If the library is no longer receiving a periodical still being published and previously cataloged as complete it is unnecessary to change the cards (except for such statements as may, e. g. for editors, be made to "date") since where the exact dates and volume numbers of the volumes cataloged are given the essential facts appear. If, after an interval, the periodical is again received, it may then be cataloged according to section 129. 1 When the statement begins with v.i, if it is thought important that in case the person's or institution's relation to the periodical should cover the entire existence of the periodical the volume statement should take the regular form, e. g. yv. instead of v.1-7, the "v.i" should be given in pencil, but (specially in the case of persons) this would happen with such comparative in frequency as to be hardly worth considering. 216 PERIODICALS 128 Sample cards 7-1 1 Complete current set; hanging indention 7 Main card 005 Engl* sh historical revise, 1886- \9Y^. Lond. Longmans, 1886- 13^ v.l- S4 3 25^ e^. (Quarterly. o See next card 305 ^ 5 v. 1-5 ed.by Handell Creighton. v. 6 H Mandell Creighton, S:R. Gardiner and R.L.Poole. S:R. Gardiner and R.L. Poole. R.L.Poole. v.7-16 " 7.17-tUsL" o See next oard 217 128 CATALOGING RULES 305 ^ v.O, 0.E5 Same 3 , General index. . .v. 1-20, 1586-1905... Lond. Longmans, 1906. 59p. 25-^-cm. , v. 21-30, 1906-1915... Lond. Long- mans, 1916. 75p. 25-^om. Same 8 Subject card 505 .E5 HISTORY - PERIODICALS. English historical review. For full statement of volumes in li- brary see card beginning: English histor- ical review 9-11 Editor cards P£5 5 v.l-fc * Creighton, Mandell, 1843-1901, ed. English historical review. v.1-6. bp of London, 1886-91. 305 % £5 v.O, "»«En Gardiner, Samuel Rrawson 3 1829-1902, ed. gljish historical review. 1891-1901. hr.6-16. S> »8 Lend Sale, Edward E& V15- v^ See next oard (Extension card same as for sample 17 above) Subject card (For form for subject card see sample 13 above) 20 Editor card L.5G Hale, Edward E c verett 3 1823-1909, ed. , tend a hand. J&S7-3T, v. £-3, 15- \8. (See note on editor cards and general secondary cards, under samples for a complete finished set, paragraph indention, p. 213) 130 Added entries for partial titles. When a partial title card is needed for a periodical, begin the partial title on the top line, with either hanging indention or paragraph indention, whichever is used on the main card. Instead of writing the full title in its regular place, fill out the reference to the full title, as suggested for subject cards (section 1286(2) above) e. g. 226 PERIODICALS 130-13IC 21 Partial title card; hanging indention C12. Columbian magazine. brar lady For full statement of volumes in li« y see card beginning: Columbian 3 and gentleman's magazine Paragraph indention. If paragraph indention is used on the main card, on the partial title card the entry words should begin at the second indention, coming back to the outer indention if the title runs over the line. 131 Changed titles, a Decided changes. When a periodical makes a decided change in its name some libraries catalog under each title the volumes thus published, some libraries catalog the whole set under the earliest title with either added entries or ref- erences under later titles, some libraries (see Library of Congress practice, A. L. A. rides, p. 37) catalog the whole set under the latest title, with added entries or references under earlier titles, while others catalog the whole set under what was the latest title at the time the periodical was originally cataloged, with added entries or references under both earlier and later forms. With any of these treatments notes should be used freely to show connection with earlier and later forms (e. g. "Preceded by " or "Continued as ") and the call number of a periodical mentioned in a note or reference should (if different from the call number for the entry in hand) be given with its title. It is recommended that as a general practice the entry for the whole set be made under the latest title, according to the Library of Congress usage, with added entries (or occasionally references) under the earlier titles. b Slight changes. Very slight changes which will not affect the position of the card in the catalog and are not likely to create any difficulty in the matter of identity may be disregarded except for a note on the main card : "Title varies" or "Title varies slightly". c Editor cards, general secondary cards etc. When an editor card or a general secondary card is made for a periodical which has changed its title, it is better to use on that card the title under which the periodical was published during the time of that special editor- ship or general secondary relation, but if this extended over the change of name the title covering the longer period of the relation- 227 1310132a CATALOGING RULES ship (or the current title if included under it) would be preferable. In all cases where the relationship covered more than one title, and in many other cases (e. g". a periodical much better known under a different form of title) notes should be added referring to the other form or forms. 132 "Merged in" or "Incorporated with". Frequently one pe- riodical is combined with another. Such periodicals may all be regarded as either "merged in" or "incorporated with" the other periodical, or a distinction may be drawn between the two phrases, "merged in" being used for a periodical which seems at once to lose its identity, "incorporated with" when for a time after the combination both periodicals seem to retain a clearly defined exist- ence, as in the preservation of both names, e. g. Academy and Literature. The distinction in the phrase would be observed only in the notes, the treatment of the periodicals being the same ; i. e. the periodical "merged in" or "incorporated with" the other would be cataloged as a finished publication, taking into consideration whether or not the library set was complete. At the end of the notes the final step would be recorded ; as, under Literature: "In- corporated with the Academy (052 qA16) Jan. 18, 1902." On the card for the periodical in which the other was merged or with which it was incorporated, a note should be made of this fact; as, under Academy, a note: "Literature (052 qL7) was incorporated with the Academy, Jan. 18, 1902." a Method of presentation. The following chart is based on the method used by Miss Caroline Wandell in her course in cataloging at the Syracuse university library school, to show the changes in the life of a serial, and may be an aid to many who find it difficult to grasp the occasionally complicated relations of some of our periodicals. 228 PERIODICALS I32a-I33 Chicago Commons. v.YT A f . yy. m o T> S May 10 v. Oct. 1^)05 L^^A a ha*Q — L&v; v.l f Feb. ^"7 CbarVUesl review. IOv. Feb. \Soi Nov.l**\ 'Swr ■Chan t'vfeS Chari- -biesjaviA the Com v.\ Mar. Dec.\WT VbO\ Nov. 1*2)05 frurve' v.2.7. Ap.^OS As shown above, Lend a hand, which began in Jan. 1886, was in Mar. 1897 merged in Charities review. Charities revieiv, which began in Nov. 1891, was in Mar. 1901 merged in Charities. The Chicago commons, which began in Ap. 1896, at the beginning of its second volume, May 1897, changed its name to the Commons; in Nov. 1905 it was incorporated with Charities, which had begun in Dec. 1897, and the title from Nov. 1905 to Mar. 1909 read Charities and the Commons. In Ap. 1909, with v.22, this title was changed to the Survey. 133 New York state library method. In the New York state library, all serial publications, finished or current, complete or incomplete, are cataloged on large sheets, 23x29cm., to which, from the main catalog, references merely are made from the head- ing for the main entry and (when needed) from headings for subjects and general secondary entries ; entries for editors only (and analytics, when needed) being given in the main catalog. In the upper left corner of the sheet is outlined a card, on which is written the general entry for the periodical, i. e. title, imprint, collation and miscellaneous notes. The remainder of the sheet is ruled in six columns, allowing for the enumeration of about 150 items, if brief. When the periodical runs over to additional sheets a larger number of items may be recorded on these, since the greater part of the space outlined for the card is available for the "Library has" enumeration, only so much of it being otherwise used as is needed for a very brief identification entry. 229 133 CATALOGING RULES In the enumeration of volumes each bound piece is recorded separately, the entry for periodicals consisting ordinarily of only the volume number, with the corresponding dates. When, how- ever, fuller information is desirable, a longer entry is made; e. g. in the case of a serial of monographic nature, as the Johns Hop- kins university studies in historical and political science, for which the contents of each volume are given. This method, obviously demanding a much greater expenditure of time than that recom- mended above in sections 124-129 (since each volume added to the library is added separately to the sheets) offers as its compensating advantage the more exact and detailed information. 230 ALMANACS AND YEARBOOKS I34-I34b ALMANACS AND YEARBOOKS 134 Treatment. Almanacs and yearbooks are to be cataloged in general like periodicals (see A. L. A. rules, 123), except that yearbooks of societies etc. are given corporate entry (section 136 below). a Place. The separate name of the place may be omitted from the imprint when included in the name of the publisher; as, Brooklyn daily eagle. b Volumes. Such phrases as "annual issue/' "10th edition" etc. are often used with the meaning of volume and may be regarded as synonymous with that term, being used without brackets when the fact is taken from the title-page of the special volume to which the number belongs. Sometimes the information to the effect that the issue in hand is a first or second volume, etc. is given in some such place as the preface or cover and in such cases the volume number is to be given in brackets. When nothing corresponding to a volume number is given, years may be used alone. 231 135 CATALOGING RULES DIRECTORIES 135 Treatment. Follow A. L. A. rules, 125, which reads as fol- lows : Enter a directory published periodically under the first word of the title not an article, a serial number, or the initial 1 of a compiler or publisher. Enter a non-periodical directory under the name of the compiler if mentioned on the title-page. If no com- piler is mentioned enter under the first word of the title. Make added entries or references as follows: (a) Under the name of the place 2 in the case of a town, city, county, or state directory; (b) under the compiler of a directory published periodically, and under the publisher provided his name appears as a part of the title. When subject entries are not made, some libraries enter local directories under such form of the title as will make the name of the place the entry word. The added entry under the compiler of periodical directories is often unimportant and may be omitted by most libraries. For treatment of such phrases as "annual issue," "10th edition" etc. see under "Almanacs," section 134. 1 If the title of a directory begins with the initial of the name of a publisher or compiler, enter under the surname of the publisher or compiler, e. g., R. L. Polk & co.'s city of Superior directory, under Polk, R.L., & co. 2 In dictionary catalogs which make a subject entry under the name of the place, subheading Directories, this added entry or reference is of course omitted. 212 CORPORATE ENTRIES 136-138 CORPORATE ENTRIES 136 Corporate vs personal authors. The essential difference between corporate entries and the main part of the entries pre- viously treated is the use of the name of a corporate body instead of the name of a person as the author of the work. _ 137 Definitions. Author: (a) The writer of a book, as dis- tinguished from translator, editor, etc. (b) In a broader sense, the maker of the book or the person or body immediately responsible for its existence. Thus, a person who collects and puts together the writings of several authors (compiler or editor) may be said to be the author of a collection. Corporate bodies may be considered the authors of publications issued in their name or by their authority A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 13. Author entry: An entry of a work in a catalog under its author's name as heading, whether this be a main or an added heading. The author heading may consist of a personal or a corporate name or some substitute for it, e. g. initials, pseudonym, etc. A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 13. Corporate: Of or relating to any body of persons or individuals united in a company or community. Century dictionary. ( Corporate entry: Entry under the names of bodies or organiza- tions for works published in their name or by their authority. A. L. A. rules, pref. p. 14. 138 Form of entry. The sections below aim to treat of corpo- rate entries in a very general way only. Detailed instructions for the choice of headings for various kinds of corporate bodies are given in the A. L. A. rules, p. 17-33. More extensive directions are to be found in the following publication, issued by the Library of Congress: Guide to the cataloguing of the serial publications of societies and institutions, compiled and edited by Harriet Wheeler Pierson, 1919. While this is based on the A. L. A. rules, the addi- tional rules which it contains for the selection of headings, the careful details as to form of entry, and the numerous and full 'illus- trations make it of exceeding value to the cataloger of the average miscellaneous collection and invaluable to the cataloger whose work includes any great amount of material in the special field which it covers. For a discussion of the use of corporate headings see Cutter, from the bottom of p. 39, through rule 45 on p. 41. 233 I39-I4 2 CATALOGING RULES 139 Complete works vs serials. Corporate entries fall into two important divisions: complete works and serials (see defini- tion of Serial, section 119 above). a Complete works. Complete works follow the general rules for the ordinary books. b Serials. Serials, i. e. transactions, proceedings etc. are, except for the use of the author heading, treated like periodicals. 140 Reports. Reports form an important part of the publica- tions of corporate bodies and may fall into either of the two divisions: a Complete works. In this division belong the completed reports of special investigations, etc. b Serials. In this division belong all reports which may be expected to continue indefinitely, as annual or biennial reports. Generally it is easily determined to which class a report belongs, but occasionally reports appear which do not show whether or not they are to be continued and in such cases the cataloger must depend upon his own judgment, aided by such information as he may be able to obtain from outside sources. 141 Author retained in title. When the title of the book differs in character from those ordinarily used for society publica- tions it is often necessary to include in the title on the cards the whole or part of the name of the society or institution, in order to show the relation between the author heading and the title, e. g. "Lectures delivered under the auspices of the . . . society". As in the case of personal authors, the . . . need not be used to indicate the complete omission of the author heading but should, in exact work, be used to indicate the shortening of the designation, as shown above. 142 Publisher. As the corporate author is generally also the publisher this point may be assumed and the publisher's name omitted from the imprint except when it is different from the main author heading. A printer's name in the publisher's place on the title-page is to be used only in case of special doubt. The argu- ment is specially strong in favor of the author as publisher, in the case of serials, where the printer is likely to change from year to year. When thought best the name of the society or institution may be given as publisher. In such cases it is to be written either in 234 CORPORATE ENTRIES 142.144b its regular form; as, "Univ. of Illinois"; or transposed; as, "Illinois univ." even though the author form would be "Illinois. University"; or such a phrase as "[Pub. by the society]" or "[Pub. by the university]" may be substituted. 143 Spacing in headings. Subheads in corporate headings are to be set off by a period and one space. In some libraries they are distinguished by the use of a dash instead of a period, or by underlining. 144 Brackets, a Variation from title-page. Brackets are not to be used in corporate headings to show variation from the form given on the title-page, as such variation becomes necessary in a large proportion of cases in order to procure any approach to uniformity in method. b Matter supplied. Occasionally to distinguish corporate bodies or to define their character, it is desirable to supply a word which does not properly belong to the corporate name. Such supplied matter should be bracketed; as, St Peter's [Episcopal] church. 235 I45" I 47 CATALOGING RULES GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS 145 Government documents vs society publications. In the matter of cataloging, government documents fall into the general class of the publications of corporate bodies. The principal points in which they differ from society publications, etc. is the much more general need for subheads in the author headings, and the liability of departments to change their names, of bureaus to change their departmental relations and of serial publications to change their forms or titles or to be transferred from one depart- ment to another. 146 Change in author or title. In the case of a change in author or title the entire series may, as with periodicals, be entered under one form with a reference from the others, or the publications appearing under each form may be cataloged under that form, with notes showing the relations to earlier and later forms. The latter method is generally the simpler and also seems the fairer in the case of independent commissions which have become subordinate bureaus, or for publications which have been transferred from one bureau to another- 147 Reference list. A. L. A. rules, p. 17-21. American library association. Papers and proceedings, 1903, 25:176-189; 1908, 30:382-406; 1909, 31:313-329- Clarke, E. E. Guide to the use of United States govern- ment publications. Bost. F. W. Faxon co. 1919. (Useful reference ser.) Reviewed by J. I. Wyer, in Library journal, Aug. 1918, 43:623-625, and by F. R. Curtis, in Public libraries, Nov. 1918, 23 :42c;. Cutter, p.39-43. Everhart, Elfrida. Handbook of United States public documents. N.Y. II. W. Wilson co. 1910. Reviewed by J. I. Wyer, in Library journal, May 1910, 35:221. Guerrier, Edith. Federal executive departments as sources of information for libraries. Wash. Govt print. off. 1919. (U.S. Education bureau. Bulletin, 1919, no. 74) Hasse, A. R- United States government publications. Bost. Library Bureau, 1902-03. pt 1-2. 236 GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS I47-I48a Swanton, W. I. Guide to United States government publications. Wash. Govt print, off. 1918. (U.S. Edu- cation bureau. Bulletin, 1918, no. 2) U.S. Documents, Supt of. Author headings for United States public documents, as used in the official cata- logues of the superintendent of documents; 3d ed. Wash. Govt print, off. 1915. (Bulletin 18) Wyer, J. I. United States government documents. Alb. N.Y. State education dept, 1906. (New York (State). State library. Library School [bulletin] 21) U.S. government documents in small libraries ; 4th ed. rev. Chic. Amer. lib. assn, 1914. (American library association. Publishing board. Library hand- book, no. 7) 148 Author heading. In general follow A. L. A. rules, p. 17- 21, but for subheads the inverted form used by the superintendent of documents has great advantages. a Inverted vs uninverted forms} For the cataloger it may seem much easier to take a form exactly as it stands, and for printed cards which are to be distributed broadcast to libraries, among which some will prefer the uninverted and some the inverted form, the uninverted may have sufficient justification in being of the two the more easily adapted to the other usage, but for those libraries which catalog merely for their own constituencies the inverted form, which brings into prominence the significant word of the heading, has much to recommend it. It is unreasonable to demand of readers in general that they know whether an official body is a department, a division, a bureau or a commission, having a name which begins with this generic term, or whether the name actually does begin with the generic term, e. g. whether it reads "Department of health" or "Health department," specially since one state or city may use one of the forms and the next state or city use the other. Even under the same main heading there may be no consistency ; e. g. under United States is found on the Library of Congress cards "Dept of agri- culture", but "Treasury dept". Under these circumstances shall the reader look first for "Dept of war" or "War dept"? and though the cataloger's problem seems to be solved by the rule to use the direct form, not even this is really the case, for the question may 1 For further discussions see Reference list (section 147). 237 I48a-I50 CATALOGING RULES arise, "What is the direct form ?" Instances of this difficulty appear in the examples shown above, for while the Library of Congress uses on its cards "Treasury dept" and "War dept", in some of the government publications cited in section 147 the forms "Department of the treasury" and "Department of war" are given. Certainly in such cases it would be quite as easy for the cataloger to follow the rule to give precedence to the significant word of the subhead, and even if the situation is relieved as much as possible for the reader by filing under the significant word, the consultation of the catalog of any large collection will still be made sufficiently difficult by headings for committees, commissions, etc. in which there is no distinctly outstanding word and which must therefore be arranged according to their direct form. If the inverted heading is adopted for use on manuscript cards, it is still possible to combine with these cards the printed cards with uninverted headings, by indicating in some way on the latter (e. g. by underlining the first letter) the word by which the filing is to be done. 149 Main entry. When a series of department publications is kept together as a set, the main entry should be made under the name of the department, with analytics (when important) for the authors and subjects of the individual volumes (unless for this feature the library prefers to depend on the printed indexes to government documents), but if the volumes are scattered on the shelves, according to their subject matter, they should be treated as separate works, in many cases having the main entry under a personal author. If the second method is followed, series notes should be used to show the relation to the department, and a series card may be made, if considered sufficiently important. a Title entry as main entry. Some publications, e. g. the Farmers' bulletins, are so well known by their titles that the most satisfactory treatment may be to make the main entry under the title, with a general secondary entry under the department or bureau issuing the publication. 150 General secondary entries. Except when an added entry heading is for a subject or can be clearly defined (e. g. ed. or comp.) or is for an analytic, the general secondary form usually covers the situation best, and should be used freely to provide for various points of view on the part of the searcher. It is specially important in cases where there is uncertainty as to the heading 238 GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS 150151b which, out of two or more, should be selected for the main entry; e. g. in the case of a report, whether it should be regarded as the work of the office from which it comes or of the person by whom it is made, a general secondary entry being in such a case made under the heading not chosen for the main entry. 151 References. Since there is often much uncertainty as to the form of heading under which a book will be looked for in the catalog, references should be made very liberally. a From names of departments etc. Reference should always be made from the name of a department to any of its bureaus under the names of which works have been entered, and often reference should be made from the name of the department or bureau with- out the name of the country, e. g. rost-office department, see U.S. Post-office dept Longer forms for this and the following references may, if preferred, be made on the analogy of the "see" and "see also" subject references used by the Wisconsin library school, as shown on samples in section 30 above. Occasionally notes should be added to reference cards, e. g. U.S. Fish and fisheries commission, see also U.S. Fisheries bureau In July 1903 the commission became the Fisheries bureau, under the direction of the Ccmmeroe and labor department. b From chiefs of departments. If an individual has become well-known as the chief of a department it is often desirable to refer from his name to the official heading, e. g. Harris, William Torrey, 1835-1909, see also U.S. Education bureau In other cases, editor, compiler or general secondary cards are to be preferred for the individual. 239 i5ic CATALOGING RULES c From magistrates. For kings, governors, mayors, prelates etc. whose official publications seem to carry a greater degree of personal responsibility than the average official publication, a more definite form of reference may be used, e. g. Cleveland, Grover, pres.U.S. Buffjalo Jew U.S. U.S. 1837-1908, For official papers see Mayor York (State). Governor President, 1885-1689 President, 1893-?897 (Cleveland) (Cleve land) In the case of governors' and mayors' messages, etc. if they follow a uniform plan and the dates and personal name are not included in the heading, the main card is generally best made (whether the set is complete or incomplete) in the "Library has" form, listing the messages etc. by dates, followed by the name of the individual officer, in subject fulness unless some other form is more familiar, and either inverted or uninverted, according to the preference of the cataloger, e. g. 3533741 N5 New L883 York (State). Governor. Publio papers. Alb. 23-23^ <^. Library has: Flower, R.P. Blaok, F.S. 1893 -84 Cleveland, 1897-98 Grover o (Except for the date for Gov. Flower, which might call for change, the entries have been made in ink, since shifting entries would involve so much change that it would be preferable to rewrite the entire card if additional space is needed.) 240 GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS I5IC-I53 Occasionally for the state or city in which the library- is located the head- ing may cover sufficient material to warrant its being carried out on the plan for U.S. President, shown above; as, New York (State). Governor, 1883-1885 (Cleveland), by which all publications of the same official would be brought together. 152 Subject entry vs reference. A subject entry for each official publication (unless of too general a character, e. g. the president's message) is the most satisfactory, but a device by which time may be saved in some cases is the reference from subject heading to author heading. The greatest value of such a reference is in the case of a department which issues many publications falling into the same general subject, e. g. if individual subject entry for the publications of the United States department of agriculture would require many cards under the subject heading Agriculture — U.S. it would be a decided saving to refer, i. e. Agriculture— U.S. see also U.S. Agriculture dept If such a reference is made for an individual work instead of for the department publications in general, the reference should include the title of the work referred to, but generally in such cases it would be preferable to make the added entry and include the title in the "For full statement" note on subject cards, e. g. 331 ABOR AND LABORING CLASSES — KANSAS. Kanaka. Labor and indu8try bureau. Annual report. For full statement of volumes in li- brary see card beginning: Kaneaa. Labor and industry bureau (followed by the title: Annual report) 153 "Library has" statement. This statement may, as noted in section 151(c), include the name of the official for the year, and may be used for complete as well as for incomplete sets. In certain cases, the titles of the separate volumes may well be given, the 241 153-155 CATALOGING RULES statement being in the nature of contents. This last suggestion applies particularly to annual reports which specialize yearly on separate subjects, and to sets of monographs, etc.; e. g. ssee. Geologioal survey. Bulletin. Nashville. Illus. map3, 2.*ic/m.. Library has : Drainage reclamation in Tennessee. IS 10. iPO-fl4| Administrative report, 1910. 1911. [Tio^S Clay deposits of west Tennessee ; by IT. A. Nelson. 1911. O Gee next card (See first note below card under 151c) 154 Indexed sets. In some cases consolidated indexes have been published, which should be either noted or fully cataloged, in preference to the "Library has" statement ; e. g. for the Farmers' bulletin, indexes covering bulletins 1-250 (1889-1906), 1-500 (1889- 1912) and 1-1000 (1889-1918) have been issued as separate vol- umes and should be thus cataloged, while current numbers, begin- ning with no. 500 in 1912, are recorded in the Readers' guide to periodical literature. The advantage of giving such information instead of listing more than a thousand numbers is too obvious to call for comment. 155 Analytics. Analytics for completed publications do not differ from ordinary analytics. An analytic, when complete in itself but published in a serial, would generally take the regular form for an analytic, the imprint date inside the ( ) being preferably given in ink for the distinct volume or volumes in which the analytic is contained, rather than in a form designed to bring out the serial character of the set. Exception: In the case of annual reports, etc. where the title date is an important point, it is better to use, in the analytic reference, the title date instead of the imprint date, e. g. "In its Annual report for 1003. p. 64-97," rather than "In its Annual report. 1904. p. 64-97" or "In its Annual report for 1903. 1904. p. 64-97." 242 GOVERNMENT DOCUMENTS 155-156 If the report of a department or official is regularly published with that of another department or official, the first in the volumes would naturally be given the main entry, and an author analytic or reference made for the second. If the analytic form is used the items inside the ( ) would consist merely of author and title, no account being taken of dates and volume numbers, e. g. 352.(^79 1 bamdje C\7 Town. n, Ariz. Public library. Annual report. (In Camden, Ariz, officers. Annual report) 10.I ^0.0 Library has : -904-Qx J uppjl\305 ■4 Vh 90(b"QAAyYVJL 130& If the reference is preferred it would take some such form as 552.0731 r l7 laaden, Ariz. Public library, Annual report, see lamdjen, Ariz, Town officers. Annual report. The report of the library is regular- published with that of the town offi- sera Of the two forms the analytic is to be preferred, since it gives more information, takes no longer than the reference, except for the additional record of the new report, year by year, and is more readily adapted to a change in the manner of publication, e. g. issued independently. 156 Publisher. When names of printers are given in the pub- lisher's place on the title-page of official publications the pub- lisher may be omitted in accordance with section 142 above, or such a phrase may be used as "[Pub. by the state]" or "[Pub. by the city]". For works actually published by the United States govern- ment, the form "Wash. Govt print, off." is the regular form to be 243 156-157 CATALOGING RULES used, but occasionally a United States document comes to hand which is the output of an independent publisher, in which case the special publisher should be given. 157 Series notes. For documents which are published as a part of the congressional set, and as such bear the congressional serial number, the following illustrations show the form of series note used on the Library of Congress cards : (U.S. 53d Cong., 1st sess. House. Ex. doc. 36) (U.S. 53d Cong., 3d sess. Senate. Misc. doc. 5) (U.S. 54th Cong., 2d sess. House. Rept. 123) 244 MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL i58a-b(i) MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL 158 Series cards for addresses, bulletins, society publications, etc. a Addresses. In some libraries it may seem desirable to make an added entry for a society before which an address has been delivered. Such entries are made in the form of a series card, giving the name of the society as the author of the series, and the word Addresses (bracketed in exact work, if supplied) as the title. The separate addresses are then listed in regular series form, e. g. Buffalo historical society. [Addresses^ 542.74-73 Hill, H:W. Development of Consti- H55 tutional law in Mew York state. 1896. 557.4197 Hayes, G:E: Geology of Buffalo. H4\ 1869. 373.3544 Bryant, W:C. Captain Brant and B3I the Old King, 1889. b Bulletins, society publications, etc. Similar cards may be made for bulletins, society publications, etc. when the library scatters them as separate works instead of treating them as a set. In this case the title of the series represents a recognized continuation of works and should be bracketed if not given on the works themselves, as in the case of some societies which give no general title but merely their own names with perhaps the addition of a volume number. For such works the title [Publications] is generally the best one to supply. (1) Volume n u m b e r s. For bulletins, society trans- actions, etc. the volume number is more important than for the ordinary series and should be retained in cataloging. \50 LB14- ihlc=igo. University. Contributions to philosophy. 7.3,io.l Hoore, A.W. The functional versus the representational theories o£ knowledge in Looks' a Essay. 1902. 245 I58b(2)-I59a CATALOGING RULES (2) Heading. In some cases it is doubtful whether it is better to enter a series heading as a single title phrase, or as author and title, e. g. Columbia university studies in history, economics and public law. or Columbia university. Political science faculty. Studies in history, economics and public law. Some libraries prefer one form and some the other, and it makes little difference which form is chosen provided reference is made from the other form, e. g. Columbia university studies in history, economics and public law see Columbia university. Political science faculty. Studies in history, economics and public law. 159 Extracts and separates, a Extracts (collections) from periodicals. Enter a collection of extracts from a periodical under the name of the periodical provided this appears in the title of the collection. Make added entries under the title of the collection and the name of the collector. If the periodical is not named in the title enter under the collector (under title if anonymous). Give the name of the periodical in a note, and make a reference or an added entry under it. A. L. A. rules, 122. If the name of the periodical is used as the main entry, indent like an author heading, e. g. £>G3Z [Blackwood's Edinburgh magazine. Tales from "Blackwood". Edin, Blacjkwood, 1359-61. IBv.in 6, 17cm. but if the name of the periodical is used as an added entry, make this card in the form of a general secondary. If the main card is made under the name of the collector the general secondary would take the usual form, but if the main entry is under the title (section 105) it is better on the added entry card to indent as 246 MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL 1 59a- 1 60 for added entries for periodicals (section 1246(2) ) to avoid a confusing repetition of the same indention on perhaps three lines; i. e. heading, title and note; e. g. M\£2> Putnam' a' monthly, tfaga stories. 1867. Reprinted from Putnam's monthly. (rather than) Ml&o 1 |Putnam's monthly. Uaga stories. 1867. Reprinted from Putnam's monthly. b Separates. The work of a single author republished from a periodical (a separate) will not ordinarily require a reference or an added entry under the name of the periodical. A. L. A. rules, 122, note. The same rule applies to the reprint of a single article from society transactions, a collection, etc. In such cases the source should generally be given in a note, e. g. "Reprinted from the American chemical journal, Jan. 1908, v.39, no.l". If the original paging is given in the reprint, this should be retained in the cataloging, e. g. p. [23J-78, not [56] p. 160 Selections from a single work of an author. When a selection from a single work of an author is published separately under a new title, catalog fully like a new work. Information concerning the original work should be included in the new title or in a note. Make an added author entry for the original work if many titles are likely to occur under the author's name, or if the new work is of value under the original title. Add the word "selec- tions" to the original title (unless some more definite information is at hand, e. g. "part 1") and follow it by the title of the selec- tion. Omit brackets for this added title, since the entry as a whole 247 i6o CATALOGING RULES is supplied. For the imprint, give only the imprint date of the selection. Omit the collation except the number of volumes if more than one, giving it, in such cases, one centimeter after the imprint date, as on other short-entry cards. Make added title entry when desirable. i Main card D54-M Dickens, Charles, 1813-1870. Little Nell j from the Old curiosity shop j abridged for use in schools. Bost. Educ.pub.co. c c 1894 3 236p. 13om. (Toung folks' library of choice literature) 2 Title card D5W Little Nell j from the Old curiosity shop. c c 1894 3 Dickjens, Charles. 3 Extra author card f le D54-$£ Diokens, Charles, 1813-1870. Old curiosity shop: select! Nell. ity shop 1894 3 ;ions: Llt- 4 Extra title card DS4&X, I bid curiosity shop: selections. Dickens, Charles. Little Nell J from the Old ouribsity shop[7 C C 1S94 3 If it is preferred that the author card for the selection be filed with those for the original work, this may be done on the plan for the treatment suggested for translations, in section 98a, the author card for the selection being filed immediately after the author cards for editions of the complete work. 248 MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL i6ia-b 161 Criticism, a General criticism. For general criticism of an author's works (unless colored cards are used) the subject card does not differ from the ordinary subject card, the subject heading consisting of merely the name (with such titles and dates as would be used in an author heading) of the author criticized. b Special criticism. If in the case of a single work the title of the work is included in the heading on the author cards, as sug- gested for Shakespeare (section 101), a criticism of the work takes for the subject card the same heading (written in red, or in black capitals) beginning at the second indention. For a criticism of a work, the title of which is not used in the author heading for the text, write the name of the author criticized on the top line (in author fulness, with personal titles, and dates of birth and death), beginning at the second vertical line, as in the ordinary subject heading, but if the name runs over the line indent the subsequent lines one centimeter instead of one-half centimeter to the right of the second vertical line, in order that the title of the work criticized may be more distinct. On the line below the author's name write the title of the work- criticized, beginning one-half centimeter (two typewriter spaces) to the right of the second vertical line. If the title runs over the line begin subsequent lines at the second vertical line. _ Beginning with the name of the author of the criticism the entry is in the usual form for a subject card; e. g. the 1766) PHILLIPS, THOUAS, 1708-1774. HISTORY OF THE LIFE OF REGINALD IP0LE. Ridley, Glocester, 1702-1774. Review of Mr Phillips's History of life of... Pole... Lon,d. Clarke, 374p. tab. 20cm. In filing cards, the criticism of an individual work is placed immediately after the entry for the work itself. 249 i6ib-c CATALOGING RULES If the special book criticized is not evident from the title of the criticism a note should be added to the main card for the criticism, identifying the book criticized, e.g. 3\7.2.3 F34 rhomjas, J. J. Froudaoity: West Indian fables by Anthony Froule, Phil. Gebbie, Jamejs 1890 3Slp. 19^cm. Critioism of "The English in the Indies". West This note may be omitted from the subject cards if the subject heading (which includes the title of the original book) and the title of the criticism, taken together, furnish sufficient clue to the relation of the two works, e. g. 317.29 tFROUDE. JAMES ANTHONY, 1818-1894. F34- (THE). ENGLISH IN THE WEST INDIES. Thomas, J.J. Froudacity: West Indian fables by... Froude. Phil. Gebbie, 1890. 261p. 19jora. c Colored cards. Colored cards may be used for criticism, having at the top an introductory phrase, e. g. on yellow cards : 5\7.29 F34- For criticism of FROUDE, JAMES ANTHONY, 1819-1894. (THE) ENGLISH IN THE WEST INDIES, 9ee Thomas, J.J. Froudacity: West Indian fables by... Froule. Phil. Gebbie, 1890. S61p. 19-tcra. Notice that with this form of card the word "see" is used after the sub- ject heading (which is followed by a comma) to bring about a grammatical construction. Similar colored cards "For bibliography of (blue cards) and "For biography of" (green cards) may be had for those subjects. 250 MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL 162 162 Dramatizations, parodies, etc. The following rule for "dramatizations" is that of the Library of Congress: Enter dramatizations of novels, legends and the like, under the playwright, with added entry, or in special cases a reference, under the author of the original work. The added entry should give the author, followed by a brief title, and is to be arranged after all editions and translations of the original work. Dramatization Main entry ten K4Z Kest by tferr er, Paul, 1870- When knighthood was in flower: a play dramatized by Paul Kester from the novel i?„rle3 Major. cl^i&napolis? Bobbs- ill? c 1906 3 223p. SO^om. Ch; Added entry for author of original zvork K42 tfajor, Charles, 1856-1913. When knighthood was in flower. Kester, Paul. When knighthood was in flower: a play dramatized by Paul Xe3ter from the novel by Charles Major. c c 190 6 3 The same method may be used for a parody or any other work based on another; e. g. Parody Added entry for author parodied %\1 H54- Stevenson, Robert Louis, 1850-1894 Child's garden of verses. •fjord, Oliver. Kitten's garden of verses. 1911. 251 i62-i63b CATALOGING RULES Typical illustration of one book based on another Added entry for original author L43 3ray, [Asa^ 1810-1888. Lessons In botany and vegetable physiology, Leavitt. R. C-. Dutllnea of botany, for the high school laboratory and classroom; based ay's Lessons in botany. rlSOlj on Gin As shown in the samples above, the heading for the original work takes the same form as with special criticism, except that it is written in black capitals and lower case, as for an author heading, instead of in red ink or black all capitals, as for a subject. Also, as in the case of special criticism, the relation of the two books should be shown in the title or in a note, but the imprint and collation, given in full on the criticism card for an author criticized, because this is a subject card, are given in short form (i. e. the imprint date and the number of volumes when more than one) on the card for the author of the original work on which another is based. 163 Attributed author, a Doubtful authorship. In a case of doubtful authorship, if a work is attributed to a special writer it should be cataloged under his name, with (on all cards where the point is of interest) a note showing the doubt, e. g. Attributed to Shakespeare. If preferred, the phrase "attributed author" may be added at the end of the author heading, but this plan would suggest a separate alphabet for the works attributed to an author, to be arranged after his acknowledged works, and therefore it seems better to recognize the doubt only in a note. If there is a reasonable degree of doubt as to the actual authorship and the book is attributed to more than one author, make the main entry under the one for whom there is the strongest evidence, with references from the others (on the plan prescribed in b Mistaken authorship), citing in the notes on the reference cards the best authorities on which the references are based. b Mistaken authorship. Occasionally it is found that a book published anonymously has been credited to the wrong author. 252 MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL 16311-164 This difficulty may be met by cataloging the book regularly under its proved author, with a reference from the attributed author, e. g. 917.7 G4* [Oilman, Chandler Robbina : 1303-1365. Life on the Lakes; being tales and sketches collected during a trip to the pictured rocks of Lake Superior, by the Etuthcr of "Legends of a log cabin". N.Y. Dearborn, 1836. 3v. 30cm. Erroneously attributed to Margaret Fuller, marcheaa d'0Q3oli. 5177 G-4S Ossoli, Margaret Fuller, 1310-1850. Life on the Lakes. to the entry- uncle? Grllraan m&rchesa d', 1836. This book was mistakenly attributed author named above. Its full will be found in this catalog the heading for its actual author: , Chandler Robbins, 1802-1865. In some form the note of attributed authorship should be given on most, perhaps all, of the cards. c Erroneously listed. Instances also come to hand where the identity of a book is completely concealed by the publisher's form of listing. To guard against ordering duplicates these cases may be treated similarly to those of mistaken authorship, referring from the form of entry given on the publisher's list to the author and title used in cataloging, with an explanatory note on both main and reference cards, e. g. Listed by the publisher as d Call numbers and tracing. For the classes of books mentioned in b-c the card for the attributed author is chiefly in the nature of a reference card, but being for an individual book should bear the call number, as shown on the card for Ossoli, and should, on the main card, be traced as an added entry, e. g. "extra cd for Ossoli." 164 Analytics in series form. Some documents, e. g. the Declaration of independence and the Constitution, are found in 253 164-1650 CATALOGING RULES many places and it is convenient to have a record of these, though it may not seem worth while to make a separate card for each. This difficulty may be met by a form resembling a series card, e. g. U.S. 375 WTO Constitution. Text of the Constitution may be found t|he following books: Fiske, John. History of the United States for schools. 1894. p.,419,-436.. Montgomery, D:H: .. .Leading facts of American hi3tory. 1899. app.p.6-18. 165 Pamphlets. While the ideal method might be to catalog pamphlets with the same fulness as bound works, this is a point on which most libraries feel that they can and must economize. If a separate catalog of pamphlets is kept a much simpler form may be adopted than is used for books, but if with a view to the greater convenience in use the cards for pamphlets are filed in the general catalog they should certainly conform in the matter of the headings, but beyond that point simpler methods might be permitted. a Collections. For treatment when two or more pamphlets are bound together see sections 113-114. b Separately bound. It is natural to give to the pamphlet separately bound as exact treatment as to other books, but the importance of this is open to question. As comparatively few pamphlets appear in different editions, the question of identity, even for minute bibliographic work, does not often rise, and following the author's name the remainder of the entry might often be cut down to a brief title, imprint date and main paging, except in the case of oversized pamphlets or articles issued in a series (generally in the case of pamphlets, an official series), when these items also should be noted. Added entries and references should be made as far as needed to insure the ready finding of the publication. c Unbound. In dealing with unbound pamphlets there are wide variations in practice: (1) entries may be made under author, title and subject, as for bound volumes; (2) under author only, with a 254 MISCELLANEOUS PRINTED MATERIAL 165C-166 view to finding a special pamphlet and avoiding the accumulation of duplicates, with reliance on the subject arrangement on the shelves, to meet the calls from the subject side; (3) under subject only, ignoring the possibilities of a call from the author side and probabilities of duplication; (4) a partial combination of the last two methods, making entry under author's name, but under the subject heading, a reference to the shelves; (5) a reference to the shelves from both author and subject; (6) a selection from the various methods, making sometimes an author entry, sometimes a subject entry and sometimes both, according to the apparent merits of the individual case, allowing also for a certain portion of pam- phlets which it seems desirable to keep and which, nevertheless, do not seem to warrant the expenditure of time for even the simplest cataloging, and which are therefore disposed of by determining the classification and sending them, without further consideration, to be shelved or filed with other material on the same subject. As in the case of separately bound pamphlets, such added entries and references should be made as are needed to insure the ready finding of the pamphlet from the basis on which it is treated. 166 Clippings. For a volume of clippings, catalog in regular form, supplying (as far as practicable) the various details, from the book in hand. In exact cataloging, if the volume has a manu- script title-page the use of dots and brackets should follow the regular rules, if there is no title-page this fact should be men- tioned in a note and brackets may be omitted in the entry. If the volume includes the writings of several authors the main entry should be made under the title, as in section 105. If the pages or leaves are not numbered and are too numerous to count write Unp. in the place for pages. Make a note showing the character of the book. Include in the note the name and date of the source or sources, if evident and not too numerous ; e. g. Mounted newspaper clippings from the Boston transcript, Jan. 11-May 16, 1910. 255 166-167 CATALOGING RULES Huntl, Anna Dorothea. Miscellaneous writings, 18791-30. 21 f. 19 om. No plaoe, No title-page. Mounted newspaper clippings, vith authlor's autograph. 167 Maps. Enter maps under the cartographer [map maker]. If the name of the cartographer is not found, enter under the publisher. A. L. A. rules, 6. The title, imprint and collation follow, as far as practicable, the rules for cataloging books, but in the collation the size should be given for maps cataloged separately, even if the library does not make a practice of doing this for books. In measuring a map, give the height by the length, taking the outside ruling of the map, nut the measurements of the paper on which it is printed. If the map is folded in covers for shelving as a book, the full measure- ment of the map may be followed in curves by the word "folded" and the cover measurement as for the ordinary book, e. g. 65x100cm. (folded, 24cm.) The scale of the map should be given in a note. An inset map (i. e. a map within a map, often in one corner of the larger map) should be mentioned in a note and, if important, cataloged separately, the phrase "Inset on" being used instead of the word "In" to introduce the analytic reference to the main entry (to show that the inset map appears on the face of the larger map). Further suggestions as to the cataloging of maps and atlases may be found in Notes on the cataloging, care and classification of maps and atlases, by Philip Lee Phillips, published by the Library of Congress in 1915. Samples of main cards 3\2.74"T53stodiard, Seneca, RcOft S& editions, 13c place of publication, 146(1)^.292 punctuation, 66,/ subject headings, 5a used in tracing, 256 Accents for French and Greek words, 13k Accession number, 17 added editions, 117/2 Added editions, 115 S.C. p. 197-98 accession numbers, 117/1 author card, 117 S.C.p.197 call number, 117(7 collation, 117c dash for author's name, 117a definition, 116 edition, statement of, 117b editor cards, 1172 fiction, 1150 imprint, 117c later and earlier, arrangement, 117/ more than two, 1170(3) notes, 1 17c? series note, 117c spacing, 117b, c subject cards, 117? S.C.p.197 title, repetition, how indicated, 117b title, variations in, 1176(5) title card, 117^ S.C.p.198 translator card, S.C.p.198 Added entry, definition, 19 Added entry cards anonymous books, 926 (2), c collections under title, 106 editor, compiler, translator, etc., 40,63 S.C.p.59-61,84 editor of series, 72 government documents, 151 independents, 1146(3) (6) initials, books published under, 93b joint authors, 54 S.C.p.73,74,76 pencil notes for incomplete works, 83 periodicals complete finished sets, 1246 complete current sets, 1286 incomplete sets, 1296 pseudonym, 86^ sacred books, 99^(5) tracing, 256 Addresses, series cards, 158 Almanacs, 134 Alternative title, 376,95a note article not omitted, 13^(1) capitalization, 3a definition, 11 on title card, 376 punctuation, 6/ See also Partial title Analytical entry, definition, 108 Analytics, 10S S.C.P.173-S4 A.L.A. code, iwp(i) author, 109 S.C.p.173-79 author's name, 1106 call number, not collation, uo(3) within an analytic, lion Annual reports, 140 analytics, i$5note omission from title, 136 Annuals, 119,134,1396 See also Periodicals Anonymous books, 92 credited to wrong author, 163& definition, 91 Anonymous classics, 99 S.C.p. 144-45 brackets not used, 6d,99 Arabic figures, 4 for dates, 14c in the title, 13/ page references in notes, 4gnote paging, 15* paging of analytics, uoa note volumes, 15a" (2) Arrangement of cards, routine of work, 80 Art objects, 169-77 Article disregarded in alphabeting, i$e in the midst of a title, 13^(1)2 inclosed in curves, 132 (2) initial, omission of English article, 136,2(1) retained in foreign languages, 13*0) . ■. vs numeral adjective, 132(3) Articles in various languages, list of i3*(3).P-289 Associations, see Societies Asterisks, books published under, 93, 940 Atlases, 118, 167 size, 150(2) Attributed author, 163 Author definition, 137 joint, see Joint authors selections from a single work published separately, 160 voluminous, 100 S.C.p. 157-58 Author analytics, 109 S.C.p.173-79 tracing, 110/ Author cards, 10 S.C.p.16,17 compiler as author, 60 contents, 74 contents in incomplete worKS, 84c editor as author, 60 editor's and translator's name in title, 1323 indention, 12a* series note, 69 simplified form, 10 translator as author, 60 See also Main cards Author entry, definition, 11,137 Author style, use of term, 216 note, 31 Author's name, i2,6mote analytics, nob,f editor cards, 42b integral part of title, 13/ omission from title, 13b omission from title requires use of pronoun, 13/1 reference from shorter form to full name, 590 secondary fulness, 226 spacing, 2/ subject entries, 22b in title, fulness, 130 on title cards, 370 variant spellings, references, 5Qt See also Corporate entry; Name references Authority list, p. 273-79 Autobiography, p.270 Bible, 99c S.C.p.151-54 Bibliographies, compiler, 60 colored cards, 161 c Binders, added entry for, 44 Binder's titles, 96 S.C.p.133 Biographees names, fulness in title, Biographies, individual colored cards, 161 c no title card in certain cases, 880 series, 726(5) Biography, treatment, p.270-72 Bishop, William Warner, Value of a knowledge of cataloging, p.5-7 Body as author, 136 "Bound with" note, 1130V Brackets, 6d,hj additions to book title, 13/1 analytics, noc(4),i author's names, 1261 analytics, 1106 authors of anonymous books, 920 dates, 142(4) for periodicals, 1240(2) (c) edition, statement of, 1322 editor cards, periodicals, 1286 (3) (a) name of state, 146(2) not used in certain cases, 6o* anonymous classics, 6d,99 call numbers, volumes, 1250 corporate headings, 6d,i44 editor and author, volumi- nous authors, 104 heading on series card, 72a (8) 294 INDEX periodicals, volume numbers, in call numbers, 125a personal titles, 1261 references, 57 sacred books, 6d,99 series, 68 titles, general, 6d page numbers supplied, 15c (1), (3), (6), nofc( 4 ) place of publication, 146(4) public library and small library usage, 6d2 Bulletins, series cards, 1586 Bureaus, publications, 145 Call numbers, 16 added editions, 117 g analytics, 1101 changed titles, 976(4) editor cards, 42^ not given on reference cards, 34 subject cards, 24 title cards, 37/j Capitalization, 3 Bible, 99^(8) title, 13m Cards, arrangement, routine of work, 8a Cataloging, value of a knowledge of, by W. W. Bishop, p.5-7 Catch titles, 95,101,102,103 Changed names, references, 59/1 Changed titles, 97 periodicals, 131 Checks, title-page, 136 note Class work, 8 Clippings, 166 Collation, 15 added editions, 117c analytics, noe definition, 11 editor cards, 42c? joint author cards, 540(5) periodicals complete finished sets, 124a (4) complete current sets, 128a (3) position, 156 spacing, \c,2m subject cards, 24 title cards, 2>7f Collections compiler, editor or translator as author, 60 from periodicals, 1090(0,1590 under title, 105 Colon, 6g Colon abbreviations for forenames, 22&3,p.290 Colophon date, definition, 11 Colored cards for criticism, etc., 161c Columns, 15^(8) Comma, 6g note,6j,i2bi Commentaries, 99c (10) Compiler, defined, 38 Compiler as author, 60 S.C.p.83,84 joint compilers, 64 Compiler cards, 40,60 government documents, 1516 Compound surnames, 592 Contents, 73 S.C.p.98, 100-4 collected works, 1090(1 ) incomplete works, 84 S.C.p.108-9 independents, 1146(2) substitutes for, 80 Continuations, 1396 See also Periodicals Copies, 115a Copyright date, 14^(4), (5) definition, 11 not given on title cards, tfe Corporate, definition, 137 Corporate bodies, names in title, 13a Corporate entry, 136 brackets not used in heading, 6d, 144 definition, 137 joint authorship, 540(1)36 Correspondence, 54o(i),p.272 Countries, official publications, 145 Cover titles, 96 S.C.p.133 Criticism, 161 Cross references, see References Curves analytics, reference to main work, 110/ brackets on title-page, 6a*i double punctuation, 6/ initial article, 13^(2) maiden name of married women, 120,2264 series note, 69 Cyclopedias contents in incomplete works, 84 editor, 60 Dash, author's name, added edition, 1 1 70 subject heading, 210" Date, 14c copyright, 14c (4), (5) definition, 11 editor cards, 42a* false, 14^(2) imprint, definition, ir inclusive, i4c(3),(4),(5).37* no date, 14c (4) other than of Christian era, 14c (1) 295 CATALOGING RULES Date (continued) periodicals complete finished sets, 124a (2)( Printed forms, 168 I Printer, definition, 11 Prints, 177 Proceedings of societies and institu- tions, 119,1396 Professional titles, see Titles of honor Pseudonym reference, changed titles, 976 Pseudonyms, 86 S.C.p.l 11,113-16 definition, 85 Public documents, 145 Publication, place of, 146 abbreviations, 146(1), p.292 different volumes in different places, 146(7) foreign, 146(3) more than one, 146(6) not given, 146(4) place-name followed by state, 146(2) spacing, 2m Publishers, 11,146 added entry for, 44 corporate entries, 142 foreign, 146(5)2 government documents, 156 lists, 146(5)1 more than one, 146(6) more than one in the same place, 146(0) more than one place for the same, 14K8) name, 146(5) names in language of title-page, 146 of periodicals complete finished sets, 124a (3) («)(*) complete current sets, 128a (2)(o) incomplete sets, 1290(2) (a) spacing. 2m Punctuation, 6 analytics, iio/t contents, 79 imprint, 6f joint author cards, 540(1)2 series, 720(8) title, 13m Question mark, 6/ Quotation marks, 6cJ Rare books, titles of, 1364 Reading lists, art objects, 173 References Bible, 99c (3) color of ink for, 31 defined, 26 editor of series, 72a,c filing, 35 government documents, 151,152 subject heading to author head- ing. 33,152 300 INDEX title of series to author, 720(5) title of series to editor, 720" (2) tracing, for titles not in library, 080(2) translations under diffeient titles, 980(2) See also General references; Name references; Subject ref- erences Reporters of trials, added entry for, 44 Reports, 119,140 analytics, i55no/c Reprints, 115,159k Revision marks, 8c Roman numerals, 4,1201 Rubber stamps, 74,77 Rulers numerals used after names of, 4, i2binote,Jsl official publications, 151c Running titles, 96 Sacred books, 99 brackets not used in headings, 6^,99 Sculpture, catalog entries for, 169-77 Secondary cards, see Added entry cards, General secondary cards Secondary entry, defined, 19 Secondary fulness, 220 "See analytics", noo "See" references, 28 S.C.p.48 "See also" references, 29 S.C.p.49 filing, 35 Selections from a single work of an author, 160 Semicolon, 6f,i Separates, 159 Sequels and supplements, 50,118 Serial number, omission from title, I3& Serials definition, 119 treatment, New York state li- brary method, 133 See also Periodicals Series, definition, 65 Series cards, 71 S.C.p.SS-89,93-96 added editions, 117 addresses, bulletins, society pub- lications, etc., 158 Bible, 99^(7) series by one author, 720(5) S.C.p.96 Series entry, definition, 70 Series form for analytics, 164 editor card, 104 Series notes, 65 added editions. 117c brackets not used, 68 documents, 157 spacing, ic,2in Signature, cataloger's 18 Simpler cataloging, io,22bi. S. C. p. 17, 39-40, 57, 60-61, 65-66 Size, I5£ independents, 1130 omission of, l$g note periodicals complete finished sets, 124a (4)(c) complete current sets, 128a (3)(0 Sobriquets, 00 Societies as authors, 136 joint authorship, 540(1)30 names in title, 13*7 proceedings, 1396 publications, series cards, 1586 Sovereigns numerals used after names of, 4,12^1710/^,13/ official publications, 151c Spacing added editions, uyb,c analytics, no/z author headings, 2J,g,\2b\ collation, ic,2in contents, 7$note dates of birth and death, 1202 handwritten cards, \b,c,d headings, voluminous authors, ioia imprint, ic,2m,i4 initials, 12c series cards, 720(4) note subject heading, 210* typewritten cards, 2 Special catalog, museum objects form of, 176 value, 171 Specific references, 30a filing, 35 Spelling errors, how indicated, 13* forenames or surnames, refer- ences from variant spellings, 59* Stamps, 74, 77 State publications, 145 Subheads, Government documents, inversion, 148 Subject analytics, 100,1090 S.C. p.175- 84 tracing, 110/(2) Subject card and title card, choice between, 36 Subject cards, 19 S.C.p.38-40 added editions, 117c S.C.p.197 anonymous books, 920(2) changed titles, 070(2)0 collections under title. T07 301 CATALOGING RULES Subject cards (continued) contents, 74 contents in incomplete works, 84c criticism, 161 editor's and translator's name in title, 13^3 government documents, 152 joint authors, S.C.p.73-76 periodicals complete finished sets, 124b S.C.p.21 1,213 complete current sets, 1286 (2) incomplete sets, 1296(2) series note, 69 tracing, 25ft Subject fulness, 226 Subject headings, 21 abbreviations, 5a books on, 210 choice of, 21a color, 21b list, 21a note, 34,^.278 position, 21c punctuation, 2id spacing, 21 d Subject references, 26 S.C.p.48,49 color of ink used for, 31 filing, 35 general references, 30& list, 34 tracing, 34 Subject style, 21b note, 31 Subtitle, 376,95a note definition, 11 punctuation, 60 Supplements, 50,118 S.C.p.200 periodicals, 1240(7) Surnames compound, 59^ variant spellings, references, 59/ with prefixes, references, 59^ See also Author's name ; Married women Table, definition, 15/(2) Tables, 15/(1) footnote 5 Three dots, see Omissions from title Title, 13 abbreviations not used in, 56 added editions, 117& additions in brackets, 13A additions in language of, 13/t alternative, see Alternative title analytics, 1 roc,/ anonymous books, 920(1 ),b(l), .(3) binder's, 96 changed, 97 periodicals, 131 collections under, 105 copied exactly from title-page, 13b cover, 96 definition, 11 editor cards, 42c editors' names included in, 13^3 explanatory, punctuation, 6a fulness of names in, 13a half, 96 in more than one language, 13&2 indention, 120,23 joint author card, 54a (3), (4) omissions from, see Omissions from title partial, 95,i02r2 periodicals, 130 running, 96 should begin with first words of printed title, 13& single phrase or combination of phrases, 13m spacing, ic,2i spelling, 131 subject cards, 23 translation, 376 translations under different titles, 98 translators' names included in, 13^3 Title card and subject card, choice between, 36 Title cards, 36 S.C.p.57 added editions, ii7e analytics, 109c S.C.p. 174-83 tracing, 110/(2), (3) anonymous books, 92a (2), 6(5) Bible, 99<:(6) binder's titles, 966 changed titles, 970 periodicals, 131 cover titles, 960 half titles, 960 indention, 37a,g initials, asterisks, etc., books pub- lished under, 936,94a (2), 6 (3) partial title, 95,i02C2 periodicals, 130 pseudonyms, books published under, 88 S.C.p.i 13-14 running titles, 966 translations under different titles, 980(1) voluminous authors, 102 S.C. p.157 Title entry defined, 36 government documents, 1400 as main entry, 149a periodicals, 124 Title of series, reference to author, 72a($)note Title-page definition, 11 more than one, 13&2 302 INDEX Title-page checks, 13b footnote series entries, J2e Title-pages in foreign languages, 1363 of different volumes, varying, 1301 Title reference, changed titles, 97& (i)(6) Titles of honor, I2b,6itwte abbreviations, 1261 author of series, 720(3), (5) author's name, analytics, 110& editor of series, 720(3) joint authors, 540(1) list, p.291 omission in contents, 75 omission in title, 13& pseudonyms, 86b,c punctuation, 12&1 spacing, 2(7,1261 Titles of noblemen brackets not used for, 6d given in contents, 75 reference from and to, 59 S.C. p.8o Titles of rare books, 13&4 Tracing, 25 S.C.p.46 analytics, 110/ changed titles, 97&(s) changed titles, notes, 976 general secondary entries, 46 independents, 1136,1146(3) (e) partial titles, 95c references, 34 references for titles not in li- brary, 980(2) routine, 80 series cards, references, 72^(2) series entries, 72d(i) Transactions of societies and institu- tions, 119,139ft Translation, statement regarding, punctuation, 6h Translations, title, 37ft Translations under different titles, 98 S.C.p. 139-43 Translator as author, 60 fulness of name in title, 130 on title cards, 370* title includes name of, 13^:3 Translator cards, 40 S.C.p.6o analytics, logd Bible, 99c (5) S.C.p.152 changed title, 976(2) (c) tracing, 256 Trays, catalog, labels on, p. 287 Typewritten cards, 2 Umlaut, 13/.59/ S.C.p.79,81 Various pagings, independents, "4K3) Volumes, 150" (2) analytics, 110^(4) inclusion in call numbers, 1 1 Oi annuals, 1346 bulletins, society transactions, 1586(1) definition, I5d(i) editor cards, 420* incomplete sets, 82 paged continuously, 15^(10) periodicals complete current sets, 1280 (3) (a) complete finished sets, 124a (4) (a) inclusion in call number, 125, 128c litle cards, 37/ Voluminous authors, 100 S.C.p. 157- 58 Vowels, modified, 137,59; S.C.p.79,81 Women, married, see Married women Writing, 10 Year-books, 119, 134 303 °[' SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed. ..^SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY D 000 341 113